Nokia Solutions and Networks T6FE1 PCS Licensed Transmitter User Manual 68P09262A58 C

Nokia Solutions and Networks PCS Licensed Transmitter 68P09262A58 C

Contents

User Manual 3 of 3

FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 4: Acceptance Test ProceduresTable of ContentsAutomated Acceptance Test Procedure 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Options 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Prerequisites 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX Antenna Connections 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Test Equipment Set–up 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All–inclusive Tests 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX/RX ATP Test 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX ATP Test 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX ATP Test 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX and TX Testing 4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Tests 4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Acceptance Test 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYUpdating Calibration Data Files 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Caveats 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Load Cal File to the CBSC 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Automated Acceptance Test ProcedureFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-1PRELIMINARYIntroductionThe Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers(CFEs) to run automated Acceptance Tests on all BTS SubsystemDevices equipped in the CDF using the LMF and the Test Equipment itsupports.The CFE can choose to save the results of ATP Tests to a report file fromwhich ATP Reports are generated for later printing. See the Generatingan ATP Report section in this chapter.Because Test Equipment Functions during Acceptance Testing arecontrolled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the Test EquipmentModels supported by the LMF can be used.– Before using the LMF, read the Release Notes“Caveats” section in the WinLMF On-Line HelpSR2.16.x for any applicable information.– The ATP Test is to be performed on out-of-servicesectors only.– DO NOT substitute Test Equipment with othermodels not supported by the LMF.NOTERefer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed forcalibrating equipment, cables, and other Test Equipment Setcomponents.Reduced ATPEquipment has been factory–tested for FCC Compliance.If license–governing bodies require documentationsupporting BTS Site Compliance with regulations, a fullATP may be necessary.Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specificBTS Site are NOT required.NOTEAfter downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):1. Verify that the TX/RX Paths by performing TX Calibration, TXAudit, and FER Tests.2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) todetermine the applicable test that must be performed.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – continued 4-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYIn the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a ForwardLink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX Tests for troubleshooting: TX Spectral Mask, TX Rho,and TX Code Domain.ATP Test OptionsATP Tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX Tests verify that the performance of the BTS TransmitElements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, Trunking Modules, theLPA Modules, and passive components including Splitters,Combiners, Bandpass Filter(s), and RF Cables.SAll RX: The RX Test verifies the performance of the BTS ReceiveElements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for Companion Frames),BBX, MCC, GLI Cards, and the passive components including RXFilters and RF Cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX Tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX Calibration, downloads BLO,and executes the TX Audit before running all TX and RX Tests.ATP PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP Tests, ensure that the following havebeen completed:SBTS has been optimized (BBX Cards calibrated and BLOsdownloaded) (Chapter 3)SThe carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out ofservice at the CBSC.SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSM Cards, GLI Cards, BBX Cards, MCC Cards and TSU (if theRFDS is installed) have correct code and Data Loads.SPrimary CSM and GLI are INS_ACTIVE (bright green).SMCC Cards are INS_ACTIVE (bright green).SNo BBX Cards are keyed (transmitting).SBBX Cards are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest Cables are calibrated.STest Equipment has been selected, warmed–up 60 minutes, andcalibrated.SGPIB is on.SBTS Transmit Connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-3PRELIMINARY1. All Transmit Connectors must be properly terminatedfor all ATP Tests.2. Before the FER is run, make sure that one of thefollowing is done:– All transmitter Connectors are properly terminate OR– All LPA Modules are turned OFF (circuit breakerspulled)Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodilyinjury or equipment damage.WARNINGTX/RX Antenna ConnectionsFigure 4-1 identifies the Frame Transmit and Receive AntennaConnections where measurements are to be taken.FRONTTX on TRF or TX/RX MAIN on DRFREARRX DIV RX MAIN on TRFNot Used on DRFti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw REFFigure 4-1: TX and RX Antenna Connections on I/O Panel4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up 4-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRequired Test EquipmentThe following Test Equipment is required:SLMFSPower Meter (used with HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications System AnalyzerSSignal Generator for FER Testing (required for all CommunicationsSystem Analyzers for 1X FER)–Before installing any Test Equipment directly to anyBTS TX OUT Connector, verify that there are noCDMA Channels keyed.– At active sites, have the OMC–R/CBSC place thecarrier assigned to the LPA Modules under test OOS.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGThe Test Equipment must be re–calibrated before using itto perform the TX Acceptance Tests.NOTEAcceptance Test EquipmentSet–upAll ATP Testing Perform the procedure in Table 4-1 to Set–up Test Equipment for alltests..4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-5PRELIMINARYTable 4-1: Set–up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests ProcedurenStep Action1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF Computer to the BTS.– Refer to Table 3-6 and Figure 3-3.2If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS.– Refer to Table 3-10.3If it has not already been done, connect Test Equipment for Acceptance Testing.– Refer to Figure 3-20, Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, or Figure 3-25, asapplicable, for the Test Equipment and Antenna Duplexing being used.* IMPORTANTLMF–based Measurements factor into TX Test Test Cable Insertion Loss between the RF ModemFrame and Test Equipment.If additional attenuation, such as external TX Combiners, is inserted in the path, it must beidentified to the LMF by including it in the TX Test Cable Calibration.– If this is not possible, include the attenuation in the TX Path by editing Test Cable InsertionLoss Values (refer to Table 3-35).– Failure to do this will result in test inaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures because the additional losses would not be compensated for in the test measurements.4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAll–inclusive TestsGeneral The all–inclusive Acceptance Tests are performed from the LMF GUIEnvironment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviated ATPsbecause they execute various combinations of individual AcceptanceTests with a single command. This allows verification of multipleaspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed forindividual Test Set–up and initiation.Abbreviated ATP Options There are three abbreviated Acceptance Tests that evaluate differentperformance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing tomeet the specific requirements for individual Maintenance andPerformance Verification situations. The following items summarize thecoverage of each Abbreviated Test.:SAll TX/RX: Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selectedMCC Cards and BBX Cards.SAll TX: Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected MCCCards and BBX Cards. Testing is the equivalent of performing all ofthe following individual tests:–TX Mask Test–Rho Test–Pilot Time Offset Test–Code Domain Power TestSAll RX: Performs complete Receive ATP on the selected MCC Cardsand BBX Cards. Testing is the equivalent of performing the FER Test.Abbreviated Acceptance Test Procedures Procedures to accomplish each type of Abbreviated ATP are included inthe following subsections..All TX/RX ATP Test Perform the procedure in Table 4-2 to perform the Abbreviated,All–inclusive Transmit And Receive Test.Table 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment initially for Abbreviated Tests as described in Table 4-1.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting thanthe one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again withthe new Multi–Channel Preselector setting.– Using the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.table continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-7PRELIMINARYTable 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test ProcedurenActionStep2Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.6Select the appropriate RX Branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the Pull–down Menu.* IMPORTANTThe RX Main and Diversity Paths must be tested separately for this configuration because eachrequires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper Test Signal Gain.NOTEIf a Companion Frame with the Inter–frame Diversity RX Cabling disconnected is being tested donot select BOTH in this step.7In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600 3=9600 1X) from the Pull–downMenu.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.8Enter the Channel Elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) Box.– By default, all Channel Elements are specified.– The Channel Element Numbers are 0.based; therefore, the first Channel Element is 0.NOTEUse one of the following methods to enter more than one Channel Element:– Enter non–sequential Channel Elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).– Enter a range of sequential Channel Elements by typing the first and last Channel Elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).table continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued 4-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test ProcedurenActionStep9In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Acceptance Tests from thePull–down Menu.– Refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the BayLevel Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.10 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.11 Execute the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.12 Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. All TX ATP Test Perform the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the Abbreviated,All–inclusive Transmit Test.Table 4-3: All TX Acceptance Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for Abbreviated Tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All TX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.table continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-9PRELIMINARYTable 4-3: All TX Acceptance Test ProcedurenActionStep6In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from thePull–down Menu.NOTEThe Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.7In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Acceptance Test from the Pull–downMenu.– Refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the BayLevel Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.8 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.9Execute the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.10 Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. All RX ATP Test Perform the procedure in Table 4-4 to perform the Abbreviated,All–inclusive Receive Test.Table 4-4: All RX Acceptance Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for Abbreviated Tests per Table 4-1.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting thanthe one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again withthe new Multi–Channel Preselector setting.– Using the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.2Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All RX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).table continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued 4-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 4-4: All RX Acceptance Test ProcedurenActionStep5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.6Select the appropriate RX Branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the Pull–down Menu.7In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thePull–down Menu.NOTEThe Rate Set Selection of 1 is only available if non–1X Cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.8Enter the Channel Elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) Box.– By default, all Channel Elements are specified.– The Channel Element Numbers are 0.based; that is the first Channel Element is 0.NOTEUse one of the following methods to enter more than one Channel Element:– Enter non–sequential Channel Elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).– Enter a range of sequential Channel Elements by typing the first and last Channel Elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).9 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.10 Follow Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– When the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.11 Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. 4
Individual Acceptance TestsFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-11PRELIMINARYRX and TX TestingThe following individual ATP Tests can be used to evaluate specificaspects of BTS Operation against individual performance requirements.All testing is performed using the LMF GUI Environment.TX TestingTX Tests verify any given Transmit Antenna Path and Output PowerControl. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated TestEquipment. All measurements are made at the appropriate BTS TXOUT Connector(s).TX Tests verify TX Operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link usingselected BBX Cards assigned to respective Sector Antennas. Each BBXis keyed–up to generate a CDMA Carrier (using both bbxlevel andBLO) at the CDF File–specified Carrier Output Power Level.RX TestingRX Testing verifies Receive Antenna Paths for BBX Cards selected forthe test. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated TestEquipment to inject a CDMA RF Carrier with all zero Longcode at thespecified RX Frequency at the appropriate BTS RX IN Connector(s).RX Tests verify RX Operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link usingall equipped MCC Cards assigned to all respective sector/antennas.Individual TestsSpectral Purity TX MaskThis test verifies that the transmitted CDMA Carrier Waveformgenerated on each sector meets the transmit Spectral Mask Specification(as defined in IS–97) with respect to the assigned CDF File Values.Waveform Quality (Rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot Channel Element DigitalWaveform Quality (Rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMAModulation Spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CommunicationsSystem Test Set Measurement Interval (based on the BTS System TimeReference) and the incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS(Pilot only, Walsh Code 0).Code Domain Power/Noise FloorThis test verifies the Code Domain Power Levels, that have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh Channels, using the OCNS Command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the Noise Floor of all EVEN–numbered “OFF”Walsh Channels measures < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1Xwith respect to total CDMA Channel Power.4
Individual Acceptance Tests – continued 4-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBTS FERThis test verifies the BTS Receive FER on all Traffic Channel Elementscurrently configured on all equipped MCC Cards (full rate at one percentFER) at an RF Input Level of –119 dBm on the Main RX Antenna Pathsusing operator–selected, CDF–equipped MCC Cards and BBX Cards atthe site. Diversity RX Antenna Paths are also tested using the lowestequipped MCC Channel Element ONLY.There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FERReadings taken at levels below –119 dBm, other than toverify that the FER Measurement reflects changes in theRX Iinput Signal Level.NOTE4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance TestFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-13PRELIMINARYBackgroundOverview This test verifies the Spectral Purity of each operator–selected BBXCarrier keyed–up at a specific frequency specified in the current CDF.All tests are performed using the external, calibrated Test Equipmentcontrolled by the same command. All measurements are made at theappropriate BTS TX Antenna Connector..Test Patterns There are four operator–selectable Test Patterns with which thisAcceptance Test can be performed. The patterns, along with the channelstested and Gain Setting for each, are listed in Table 3-40. Refer to “TXCalibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level Offset Calibration section ofChapter 3 for more information on the Test Patterns..Equipment Operation During Testing At least one MCC must be selected to perform the Standard, CDF Pilot,and CDF Test Patterns. For these Test Patterns, Forward Links areenabled for Synch Channel (SCH), Paging Channel (PCH), and TrafficChannel (TCH) Elements from the selected MCC(s), as shown inTable 3-40. Gain is set for the applicable channels on each antenna as shown in thetable. The operator–selected BBX Cards will be keyed using aBLO–corrected bbxlvl Value to generate a CDMA Carrier. RF OutputPower, as measured at the appropriate Frame TX Antenna Connector,will be set to one of the following depending on the OperatingFrequency Spectrum.:S800 MHz: 33.5 dBmS1.9 GHz: 31.0 dBmTest Measurements The Test Equipment will measure and return the attenuation level in dBof all spurious and IM products with respect to the Mean Power of theCDMA Channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, verifying thatresults meet system tolerances at the following test points. Refer to alsoFigure 4-2):SFor 800 MHz:– At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from Center FrequencySFor 1.9 GHz:– At least –45 dB @ + 885 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –45 dB @ – 885 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –55 dB @ – 1980 kHz from Center Frequency– At least –55 dB @ + 1980 kHz from Center Frequency4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued 4-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRedundant BBX Testing The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will beassigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then berepeated..Spectral Purity TX MaskAcceptance TestPerform the procedure in Table 4-5 to verify that the Transmit SpectralMask Specification on the TX Antenna Paths for the selected BBXCards.Table 4-5: Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX Cards to be tested.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF; select at least one MCC.– Refer to the “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” in the “BayLevel Offset Calibration” sectionof Chapter 3.4Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > TX Mask... from the Pull–down Menus.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 =9600 1X) from the Pull–down Menu in the Rate Set Box.NOTEThe Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.8In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Calibration from the Pull–downMenu.– Refer to the “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in theBay Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.9 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.table continued on next page4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-15PRELIMINARYTable 4-5: Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Test ProcedurenActionStep10 Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.11 Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. – 885 kHz + 885 kHzCenter Frequency ReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the MeanPower of the CDMA Channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference– 1980 kHz+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHzFigure 4-2: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-16 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBackgroundOverview This test verifies the transmitted Pilot Channel Element DigitalWaveform Quality of each operator–selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at aspecific frequency specified in the current CDF. All tests are performedusing the external, calibrated Test Equipment controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are made at the appropriate TX AntennaConnector..Equipment Operation During Testing Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH Elementsfrom the MCC Cards will be forward–link disabled. The selected BBXCards will be keyed–up using both bbxlvl and BLO to generate aCDMA Carrier (with Pilot Channel Element only, Walsh Code 0). RFOutput Power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate BTS TXAntenna Connector..Test Measurements The Test Equipment will measure and return the Pilot Channel ElementDigital Waveform Quality (Rho) Percentage, verifying that the resultmeets the following specification.:Waveform Quality (Rho) should be > 0.912.Redundant BBX Testing. The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will beassigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then berepeated for the Redundant BBX..Waveform Quality (Rho)Acceptance TestPerform the procedure in Table 4-6 to verify that the Pilot ChannelElement Waveform Quality (Rho) on the TX Antenna Paths for theselected BBX Cards.Table 4-6: Waveform Quality (Rho) Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX Cards to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Rho... from the Pull–down Menus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).table continued on next page4
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-17PRELIMINARYTable 4-6: Waveform Quality (Rho) Test ProcedurenActionStep5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.6 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.7Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.8Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. 4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-18 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBackgroundOverview This test verifies the transmitted Pilot Channel Element Pilot TimeOffset of each operator–selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at a specificfrequency specified in the current CDF. All tests will be performed usingthe external, calibrated Test Equipment controlled by the samecommand. All measurements will be made at the BTS TX AntennaConnector..Equipment Operation During Testing The Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all TCHElements from the MCC Cards will be forward–link disabled. Theselected BBX Cards will be keyed using both bbxlvl and BLO togenerate a CDMA Carrier (with Pilot Channel Element only, WalshCode 0). TX Power Output is set at 40 dBm as measured at the TXOutput..Test Measurements The Test Equipment will measure and return the Pilot Time Offset in ms,verifying that results meet the following specification.:Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset(zeroĄms)..Redundant BBX Testing – The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will beassigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then berepeated for the Redundant BBX..This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency andTX Waveform Quality (Rho) ATP Tests, however, onlyPilot Time Offset results are written to the ATP TestReport.NOTEPilot Time Offset AcceptanceTestPerform the procedure in Table 4-7 to verify that the Pilot Time Offseton the TX Antenna Paths for the selected BBX Cards.Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetnStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX Cards to be tested.table continued on next page4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-19PRELIMINARYTable 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetnActionStep3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Pilot Time Offset... from the Pull–downMenus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.6 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.7Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.8Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. 4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-20 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBackgroundOverview This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of eachoperator–selected BBX Carrier keyed at a specific frequency specified inthe current CDF. All tests are performed using the external, calibratedTest Equipment controlled by the same command. All measurements aremade at the appropriate BTS TX Antenna Connector..CDMA Channel Test Set–up Pilot Gain should be set to 262 for each antenna and the selected MCCCards should be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh CodeTraffic Channel Elements by enabling Orthogonal Channel Noise Source(OCNS) on all odd MCC Channel Elements (maximum 32 Full RateChannels with an OCNS Gain of 81). – All even–numbered Walsh Code Traffic Channel Elements shouldhave OCNS disabled, and are considered “OFF”. – Selected MCC Cards should be Forward–Link Enabled for theantenna (sector) under test..Equipment Operation During Testing The BBX should be keyed–up using a BLO–corrected bbxlvl Value togenerate a CDMA Carrier consisting of Pilot and OCNS Channels. RFOutput Power, as measured at the appropriate Frame TX AntennaConnector, is set at one of the following values depending on theOperating Frequency Spectrum.:– 800 MHz: 33.5 dBm– 1.9 GHz: 31.0 dBmTest Measurements The Test Equipment will measure and return the Channel ElementPower in dB of all specified Walsh Channels within the CDMAspectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify that thefollowing parameters are met. – Refer to Figure 4-3 for graphic representations.:STraffic Channel Element Power Level will be verified by calculatingthe ratio of Pilot Power to OCNS Gain of all Traffic Channels [RootSum of the Square (RSS) of each OCNS Gain divided by the PilotPower].– This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.SNoise Floor (unassigned “OFF” even–numbered Walsh Channels) isverified to be < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X withrespect to total CDMA Channel Power.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-21PRELIMINARYWhen performing this test using the LMF and the MCC isan MCC8E or MCC24E, the Redundant BBX may fail orshow marginal performance. This is due to a TimingMismatch that the LMF does not address. Performing thistest from the CBSC will not have this timing problem.NOTERedundant BBX Testing The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will beassigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then berepeated for the Redundant BBX. Upon completion of the test, OCNSChannels will be disabled on the specified MCC Channel Elements..Code Domain Power/NoiseFloor TestPerform the procedure in Table 4-8 to verify the Code DomainPower/Noise Floor of each selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at a specificfrequency.Table 4-8: Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Code Domain Power... from thePull–down Menus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.6If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 =9600 1X) from the Pull–down Menu in the Rate Set Box.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.table continued on next page4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued 4-22 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 4-8: Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test ProcedurenActionStep7 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.8Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.9Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. Pilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B ANDCDMA2000 1XInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 63MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B ANDCDMA2000 1XInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 63FAILURE – DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE – EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE – EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC.Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) ExampleFigure 4-3: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display ExamplesCode Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example4
RX FER Acceptance TestFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-23PRELIMINARYBackgroundOverview This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TCHscurrently configured on operator–selected MCC Cards (full rate at 1%FER) at –119 dBm. All tests are performed using the external, calibratedTest Equipment as the Signal Source controlled by the same command.Measurements are made at the specified BTS RX Antenna Connection..Equipment Operation During Testing The Pilot Gain on each MCC will be set to 262 for each TX Antenna,and the Forward Link for all TCH Elements from the MCC Cards willbe enabled. Appropriate BBX(s) must be keyed in order to enable theRX Receive Circuitry. Operator–selected BBX Cards will be keyedusing only bbxlvl, to generate a CDMA Carrier with Pilot ChannelElement only. Transmit Power Output is set at –40 dBm. Test Equipment Output Poweris set so that the received power at the BBX is –119 dBm. The FinalOutput Power Setting of the Test Equipment takes into account the MPCtype, BTS RF Path Losses, and test Test Cable Insertion Losses. Ifselected, the Redundant BBX will be assigned to the current RXAntenna Paths under test..Test Measurements The LMF will prompt the MCC Channel Element under test to measureall–zero Longcode and provide the FER report on the selected activeMCC on the Reverse Link for the Main and, if selected, Diversity RXAntenna Paths. Results are evaluated to ensure they meet the followingspecification.:FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500Redundant BBX Testing After the test, the BBX and the Test Equipment will be de–keyed to shutdown the Pilot Signal and the active Channel Element, respectively. Ifthe Redundant BBX was tested, BBXR assignment to an active sectorwill also be reset..FER Acceptance TestPerform the procedure in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on RX AntennaPaths using selected MCC Cards and BBX Cards.4
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued 4-24 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 4-9: FER Test ProcedurenStep Action1Set–up the Test Equipment for RX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.2If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting thanthe one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again withthe new Multi–Channel Preselector Setting.* IMPORTANTUsing the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.3Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.4Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select RX > FER... from the Pull–down Menu.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayedin the Channels/Carrier Pick List.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #Channels Box.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # ChannelsBox.7Select the appropriate RX Branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the Pull–down Menu.8In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thePull–down Menu.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non–1X Cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.9 Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.10 Follow Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button tobegin testing.– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.11 Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.* IMPORTANTIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File. 4
Generating an ATP ReportFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-25PRELIMINARYBackgroundEach time an ATP Test is run, ATP Data is updated and must be saved toan ATP Report File using the Save Results Button to close the StatusReport Window. The ATP Report File will not be updated if the StatusReport Window is closed using the Dismiss Button.ATP ReportA separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following foreach test:STest NameSPASS or FAILSDescription Information (if applicable)SBBX NumberSChannel NumberSCarrier NumberSSector NumberSUpper Test LimitSLower Test LimitSTest ResultSTime StampSDetails/Warning Information (if applicable)Perform the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printablefile for the ATP Report.Table 4-10: ATP Report Generation ProcedurenStep Action1Click on the Login Tab (if not in the forefront).2Click on the desired BTS in the Available Base Stations Pick List to select it.3Click on the Report Button.4If a printable file is not needed, click on the Dismiss Button.5If a printable file is required, perform the following actions.5a Select the desired file type (text, comma–delimited, HTML) for the report file from the Pull–downMenu at the bottom of the screen.5b Click the Save Button to save the file.– The file will be saved in the selected format in the bts–# folder for the BTS selected. 4
Updating Calibration Data Files 4-26 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYSoftware Release CaveatsSoftware Release R2.16.5.x allows the user to load the Calibration Filefrom the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then FTP thenew Calibration File to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for theuser to place the Calibration File at the OMC–R.Copy and Load Cal File to theCBSCAfter completing the TX Calibration and audit, updated CAL Fileinformation must be moved from the LMF Windows environment backto the CBSC, a UNIX environment. The following procedures detailmoving files from one environment to the other.Copying CAL Files from LMF to a DiskettePerform the procedures in Table 4-11 to copy the CAL Files from anLMF Computer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 4-11: Copy CAL Files to a Diskette ProcedurenStep Action1 With Windows running on the LMF Computer, insert a disk into Drive A:\.2Launch the Windows Explorer Application Program from the Start > Programs Menu List.3Select the applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory/cdma/bts–# Folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# Folders.Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCPerform the procedures in Table 4-12 to copy CAL Files from a disketteto the CBSC.Table 4-12: Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC ProcedurenStep Action1Log into the CBSC on the OMC–R UNIX Workstation using your Account Name and Password.2Place the diskette containing the Calibration File(s) into the Workstation Diskette Drive.3 Enter EJECT –q and press the Enter Key.4 Enter mount and press the Enter Key.NOTESVerify that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.– If the EJECT Command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber.– Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.table continued on next page4
Updating Calibration Data Files – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 4-27PRELIMINARYTable 4-12: Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC ProcedurenActionStep5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter Key.6 Enter ls –lia and press the Enter Key.– Verify that the bts–#.cal file filename appears in the displayed Directory Listing.7 Enter cd and press the Enter Key.8 Enter pwd and press the Enter Key.– Verify that the displayed response shows the correct Home Directory (/home/<user’s name>).9 With Solaris versions of UNIX, create a UNIX–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in the HomeDirectory by performing the following actions.9a Type the following command:dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.calWhere: # = BTS Number for which the CAL File was created9b Press the Enter Key.NOTEOther versions of UNIX do not support the dos2unix Command. In these cases, use the UNIXcp (Copy) Command.– The copied files contain DOS Line Feed Characters that must be edited out with a UNIX TextEditor.10 Enter ls –l *.cal and press the Enter Key. Verify that the CAL Files have been copied.– Verify that all CAL Files to be transferred appear in the displayed listing.11 Type EJECT, and press the Enter Key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 4
Updating Calibration Data Files – continued 4-28 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotes4
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 5: Prepare to Leave the SiteTable of ContentsPrepare to Leave the Site 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Test Equipment Removal 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Removal 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final Checks Before Leaving Site 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotes5
Prepare to Leave the SiteFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 5-3PRELIMINARYExternal Test EquipmentRemoval Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the Test Equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal ProcedurenStep Actionn WARNINGMake sure that no BBX Cards are keyed before performing this procedure.– Failure to do so can result in personal injury and damage to BTS LPA Modules.1At the rear of the frame, disconnect all external Test Equipment from all TX and RX Connectors.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX Antenna Feed Lines at the Frame RF InterfacePanel.* IMPORTANTVerify that all Sector Antenna Feed Lines are connected to the correct Antenna Connectors on theframe. Crossed Antenna Cables will degrade Call Processing. Bringing Modules into Servicewith the LMFWhenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the siteand enable all devices on the BTS.NOTEIf a Reason Code is present and/or data should/could not be loadedremotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-2 asrequired to bring BTS Processor Modules from an OOS State to an INSState.Table 5-2: Bring Modules into Service ProcedurenStep Action1In the LMF GUI Environment, select the device(s) to be enabled by clicking on each one.* IMPORTANTSThe MGLI and CSM must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green) before an MCC can be enabled.2Enable the Processor Cards in the following order.1. MGLI2. CSM Cards3. MCC Cardstable continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 5-2: Bring Modules into Service ProcedurenActionStep3Click on Device in the BTS Menu Bar, and select Enable from the Pull–down Menu.– A Status Report Window is displayed.* IMPORTANTIf a BBX is selected, a Transceiver Parameters Window is displayed to collect KeyingInformation. Do not enable the BBX.4 Click Cancel to close the Transceiver Parameters Window, if applicable.5 Click OK to close the Status Report Window.– Bright Green is the color of devices that successfully change to INS. LMF RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-3 as required to terminate the LMFGUI Session and remove the LMF Computer.Table 5-3: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF ProcedurenStep Action! CAUTIONDo not power down the LMF Computer without performing the procedure below; corruptedand/or lost Data Files may result.1Log out of all BTS Sessions and exit the LMF by clicking on File in the LMF Window Menu Barand selecting Logout and Exit from the Pull–down Menu.2In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.3 Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows Message appears.4Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.5Disconnect the LMF Computer Ethernet Port from the BTS Frame.6Disconnect the LMF Computer Serial Port, the RS–232–to–GPIB Interface Box, and the GPIBCables as required for equipment transport. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 5-5PRELIMINARYRe–connect BTS T1/E1 SpansBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 or E1 Span Connectors removedpreviously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-4 andFigure 3-2.Table 5-4: T1 or E1 Spans Re–connection ProcedurenStep Action1Re–connect any disconnected Span Connectors to the Span I/O A and B Boards.2If equipped, ensure that the CSU is powered ON.3Verify Span Status, ensuring that the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS. Final Checks Before LeavingSiteMake sure all requirements listed in Table 5-5 are completed beforeleaving the site.Table 5-5: Check Before Leaving the Site ProcedurenStep Action1For AC Frame only:Validate the Vtrim Signal Cabling.2Ensure that the Battery Voltage is 27 Volts at 25C.– If external batteries are provided by the Customer, ensure that the Customer Circuit Breaker isclosed.NOTEA Low Voltage Disconnect must be in series with the external batteries.3Verify that no Alarm Conditions are being reported to the CBSC after all Cabinet Doors areclosed. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYReset All Devices and InitializeSite RemotelyDevices in the BTS should not be left with Data and Code Loaded fromthe LMF. The Configuration Data and Code Loads used for normaloperation could be different from those stored in the LMF Files.The following two procedure, one for Circuit Backhaul and the other forPacket Backhaul, are provided to remotely reset the BTS Devices andthen initialize the BTS.Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and InitializationPerform the procedure in Table 5-6 to remotely reset the BTS Devices ina Circuit Backhaul BTS, and then remotely initialize the same BTS.Table 5-6: Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization ProcedurenStep Action1Terminate the LMF Session by performing the procedure in Table 5-3.2Reconnect the Spans by performing the procedure in Table 5-4.3From the BTS Site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS Reset.ORAt the BTS Site, perform the actions in Step 4 through Step 6.4Unseat one GLI Card and wait for 30 seconds.5Re–seat the GLI and wait for it to complete its Initialization Process (this takes about one minute).6Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the second GLI.7Depending on the number and configuration of installed operational GLI Cards, perform thefollowing actions.SBTS with Redundant GLI Cards, proceed to Step 8.SBTS with a non–Redundant GLI or a non–operational Redundant GLI, proceed to Step 9.8From the OMC–R, run the ACTIVATE Command on the BTS.– After the ACTIVATE Command has been executed, proceed to Step 10.9From the OMC–R, perform the following actions.9a ACTIVATE the GLI.– This action sets the NextLoad Attribute for the GLI to work with the current BSS SoftwareVersion.9b Disable the GLI.9c Enable the GLI.– This action allows the MM to load the software version specified by the NextLoad Attribute.9d Once the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R to again run the ACTIVATE Command on theBTS.table continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 5-7PRELIMINARYTable 5-6: Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization ProcedurenActionStep10 Once the GLI Cards are loaded with the specified Code Version, the active GLI will verify andupdate, as required, its RAM.– Also, if necessary, ROM Code Loads for the installed CSM, MCC, and BBX Cards using theDLM.11 After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R to confirm that the BTS isunder OMC–R control. Packet Backhaul Remote Reset and InitializationPerform the procedure in Table 5-7 to remotely reset the BTS Devices ina Packet Backhaul BTS, and then remotely initialize the same BTS.Table 5-7: Packet Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization ProcedurenStep Action1Terminate the LMF Session by performing the procedure in Table 5-3.2Reconnect the Spans by performing the procedure in Table 5-4.3Determine which of the two types of PREACTIVATE Load Processes is applicable to yoursituation.Rolling Upgrade: This Load Process is only available when the BTS Cards are populated for FullRedundancy as applicable.Quick Reboot: This Load Process is used when Redundancy for the BTS Cards is not available.– The GLI3 disables and reboots to the new Load. This will cause all the other cards to go outof service.– Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new Load and then downloadsthe cards in the order that they establish communication with the GLI3 following their reboot.– The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.4From the BTS Site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS tothe required software version for the BSS.5After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R to confirm that the BTS isunder OMC–R control. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotes5
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 6: TroubleshootingTable of ContentsBasic Troubleshooting: Overview 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force LAN A Active (LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector) 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force LAN A Active (LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN Connector) 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the GLI IP Address 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Power Meter 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Communications System Analyzer 6-7 . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Signal Generator 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Every Test Fails 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify BLO Check Box 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single–Sided BLO Check Box 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Faults Are Isolated 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flowchart Prerequisites 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Passed Reduced ATP Tests but Has Forward Link Problem in Normal Operation 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-19 . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi–FER Test Failure 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTroubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-21 No GPS Reference Source 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: RFDS 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Tests Fail 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX Paths Fail 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Tests Fail on a Single Antenna 6-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module LED Status (except GLI3, CSM, BBX, MCC) 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module LED Status Combinations 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 LED Status Combinations 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 Pushbutton and Connectors 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX LED Status Combinations 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC LED Status Combinations 6-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLPA LED Status Combinations 6-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Span Control Link 6-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Basic Troubleshooting: OverviewFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-1PRELIMINARYOverviewThe information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) Team Memberswhile performing BTS Optimization and Acceptance Testing. ThisTroubleshooting Guide was created as an interim reference document foruse in the field. It provides “what to do if” basic troubleshootingsuggestions when the BTS Equipment does not perform according to theprocedures documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs andinformation gained from experience in Motorola Labs and Classrooms.6
Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCannot Log into Cell-SiteTable 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If the LED on either GLI is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure.Reset the GLI by re-seating it.– If re–seating the MGLI does not fix the problem, proceed to Step 2.2Install a GLI Card in the Redundant GLI Slot and retry.NOTEA Red LED may also indicate no termination on an External LAN Connector (I/O Panel at the topof the frame or at the top of a Logical BTS Frame).3Circuit BTS:Verify that the Span Line is disconnected at the Span I/O Card.Circuit or Packet BTS:Verify that the OMC–R has disabled the BTS.4“Ping” the INS_ACTIVE GLI.– Refer to Table 3-15.5Verify that the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN (LAN A) at one of the following locations.– The Service Shelf below the SCCP Cage.– The BTS I/O Panel at the top of the frame.6If LAN A is not the active LAN, force a LAN Switch to LAN A by performing the procedure inTable 6-2.7Verify that the LMF was configured properly.8If a Xircom Parallel BNC LAN Interface is being used, verify that the BTS-LMF Cable is RG-58(flexible black cable, less than 2.5 feet in length).9Verify that the External LAN Connectors are properly terminated at either of the following twolocations.– Service Shelf– BTS I/O Panel at the top of the frame.10 If the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN at the Service Shelf, verify that a T-Adapter is notused on the LMF Computer or on the Ethernet Hub/Adapter Connector.11 If the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN at the Service Shelf, try connecting to the EthernetOut Port on the I/O Panel (top of frame) using the procedure in Table 3-7.12 Re-boot the LMF and retry.13 Re-seat the INS_ACTIVE GLI and retry.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-3PRELIMINARYTable 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnActionStep14 Re-seat the INS_ACT GLI and retry.15 Verify that the GLI IP Addresses are configured properly by performing the procedure inTable 6-4. Force LAN A Active (LMFConnection at I/O Panel LANConnector)Table 6-2: Procedure to Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN (LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector)nStep Action1If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all External LAN Connectors are either terminatedwith 50Ω Loads or cabled to another frame.2If it has not already been done, connect the LMF Computer to the Stand–alone or Starter Frame,as applicable (Table 3-6).3If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS on the active LAN(Table 3-10).4Remove the 50Ω Terminator from the LAN B IN Connector on the I/O Panel of the Stand–aloneor Starter Frame.– The LMF Session will become inactive.5Log into the BTS with the LMF (Table 3-10).– Forcing LAN A to the INS_ACTIVE State was successful if the LMF can log into the BTSand status any card in the cage.SIf LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 12.6With the 50Ω Terminator still removed from the LAN B IN Connector, remove the 50ΩTerminator from LAN B OUT Connector.– If more than one frame is connected to the LAN, remove the Terminator from the last frame inthe chain.7Again attempt to log the LMF into the BTS Frame on LAN A.8If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state, proceed to Step 12.– Forcing the LAN to the INS_ACTIVE State was successful if the LMF can log into the BTSand status any card in the cage.9With the 50Ω Terminators still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI Gard in each frameconnected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the SCCP Backplanes.10 Reseat each GLI Card until all are reconnected.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued 6-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-2: Procedure to Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN (LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector)nActionStep11 Allow the GLI Cards to power up, then attempt to select and status cards in the SCCP Cages.SIf LAN A is active, proceed toStep 12.SIf LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following the proceduresin Table 6-1.12 Replace the 50Ω Terminators removed from the LAN B IN and OUT connectors.NOTETo ensure the INS_ACT GLI Card does not swap LANs after LMF login, the 50Ω Terminator maybe left off of the LAN B OUT connector until LMF operations are completed. Force LAN A Active (LMFConnection at Service ShelfLAN Connector)Table 6-3: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN, LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN ConnectornStep Action1If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all external LAN Connectors are either terminatedwith 50Ω Loads or cabled to another frame.2If it has not already been done, connect the LMF Computer to LAN B on the Stand–alone orStarter Frame, as applicable (Table 3-6).3If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS (Table 3-10).4Remove the 50Ω Terminator from the LAN B IN Connector on the I/O Panel at the top of theStand–alone or Starter Frame.– The LMF session will become inactive.5Log the LMF out of the BTS.6Disconnect the LMF Computer from the Service Shelf LAN B Connector and connect it to theLAN A Connector.7Determine if LAN A is active and capable of accepting an LMF log–in by using the LMF PingUtility to query the INS_ACT GLI (Table 3-15).8If the INS_ACT GLI responds to the ping, log into the BTS on LAN A.9Attempt to select and status a card in the BTS.– Forcing LAN A to active state was successful if the LMF can log in, select, and status anycard in the cage.SIf LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 16.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-5PRELIMINARYTable 6-3: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN, LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN ConnectornActionStep10 With the 50Ω Terminator still removed from the LAN B IN Connector, remove the 50ΩTerminator from LAN B OUT connector.– If more than one frame is connected to the LAN, remove the Terminator from the last frame inthe chain.11 If LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 16.– Forcing LAN A to active state was successful if the LMF can log in, select, and status anycard in the cage.12 With the 50Ω Terminators still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI Card in each frameconnected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the SCCP Backplanes.13 Reseat each GLI Card until all are reconnected.14 Allow the GLI Cards to power up, then attempt to select and status cards in the SCCP Cages.SIf LAN A is active, proceed to Step 16.15 If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following the procedures inTable 6-1.16 Replace the 50Ω Terminators removed from the LAN B IN and OUT Connectors.NOTETo ensure the INS_ACT GLI Card does not swap LANs after LMF Login, the 50Ω Terminatormay be left off of the LAN B OUT Connector until LMF Operations are completed. Set the GLI IP AddressTable 6-4: Procedure to set GLI IP AddressnStep Action1If it has not previously been done, establish an MMI Communication Session with the GLI Cardas described in Table 3-14.2Enter the following Command to display the IP Address and Subnet Mask Settings for the card:config lg0 currentA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI3>config lg0 currentlg0: IP Address is set to DEFAULT (configured based on Card location)lg0: netmask is set to DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued 6-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-4: Procedure to set GLI IP AddressnActionStep3If the IP Address setting response shows an IP Address rather than “Default (configuredbased on Card location),” enter the following:config lg0 ip defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI3>config lg0 ip default_param_config_lg0_ip(): param_delete(): 0x00050001lg0: ip address set to DEFAULT4If the GLI Subnet Mask Setting does not display as “DEFAULT (255.255.255.128),” set it todefault by entering the following command:config lg0 netmask defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI3>config lg0 netmask default_param_config_lg0_netmask(): param_delete(): 0x00050001lg0: netmask set to DEFAULT5Set the GLI Route Default to default by entering the following command:config route default defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI3>config route default default_esh_config_route_default(): param_delete(): 0x00050001route: default gateway set to DEFAULT6When changes are completed, close the MMI Session, and reset the GLI Card.NOTEChanges to the settings will not take effect unless the GLI is reset.7Once the GLI is reset, re–establish MMI Communication with it and issue the following commandto confirm its IP Address and Subnet Mask Settings:config lg0 currentA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI3>config lg0 currentlg0: IP Address is set to DEFAULT (configured based on Card location)lg0: netmask is set to DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for all remaining GLI Cards, including those in any additionalinter–connected frames. 6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-7PRELIMINARYCannot Communicate withPower MeterTable 6-5: Power Meter Communication Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB Adapter.2Verify Cable Connections as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify that the GPIB Address of the Power Meter is set to the same value displayed in theapplicable GPIB Address Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F fordetails.4Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.5Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.6Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >Reset from the Pull–down Menus. Cannot Communicate withCommunications SystemAnalyzerTable 6-6: Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB Adapter.2Verify that the Cable Connections are as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify that the Analyzer GPIB Address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIBAddress Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F fordetails.4Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.5Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued 6-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-6: Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenActionStep6Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >Reset from the Pull–down Menus. Cannot Communicate withSignal GeneratorTable 6-7: Signal Generator Communication Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the Signal Generator is connected to the LMF containing a GPIB Adapter.2Verify that the Cable Connections are as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify that the Signal Generator GPIB Address is set to the same value displayed in the applicableGPIB Address Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F fordetails.4Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.5Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.6Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >Reset from the Pull–down Menus. 6
Troubleshooting: DownloadFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-9PRELIMINARYTroubleshooting: DownloadTable 6-8: Code Download Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the T1 or E1 Span is disconnected from the BTS at Site I/O Boards.– Refer to Figure 3-2.2Verify that the LMF can communicate with the BTS Devices using the LMF Status Function.3Establish communications with the MGLI before trying to communicate with any other BTSDevice.– The MGLI must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green).4Verify that the target card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.SIf the target card LED is solid red, it implies a hardware failure.SIf the target card LED is bright green, proceed to Step 9.5Reset the target card by re-seating it.SIf the LED Alarm is still being reported, proceed to Step 6.SIf the LED Alarm is no longer being reported, proceed to Step 9.6Replace with the same type of card from another slot and retry.7Re-seat the card and try again.SIf the Download Portion completes and the Reset Portion fails, proceed to Step 8.SIf a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after Code Download, proceed to Step 9.SIf a BBX reports a Failure Message and is OOS_RAM, the Code Load was OK.– Use the LMF Status Function to verify the Load.8Reset the device by selecting the device and selecting Reset.9Use the LMF Device > Status Function to verify that the Code Load was accepted.SIf the Code Load was accepted, proceed to Step 10.SIf the Code Load was not accepted, proceed to Table 6-9 to troubleshoot the Data DownloadFailure.10 Use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM Code into Flash Memory. 6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued 6-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCannot Download DATA to AnyDevice (Card)Table 6-9: Data Download Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat the Code and Data Load Procedure.2Verify that the ROM and RAM Code Loads are of the same release by statusing the card.– Refer to Download the BTS section of Chapter 3 for more information. Cannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in service), it must be in theOOS_RAM State (yellow in LMF Display) with data downloaded to thedevice. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green once it isenabled.The four Device States that can be displayed by the LMF are:SENABLED (bright green, INS_ACT)SSTANDBY (olive green, INS_STANDBY – Mate CSM and GLI only)SDISABLED (yellow, OOS_RAM)SRESET (blue, OOS_ROM)Table 6-10: Device Enable (INS) Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat the Code and Data Load Procedure.2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify that the CDF has correct latitude and longitude data for theCell Site location and GPS Sync.3Verify that the Primary CSM is in the INS_ACTIVE (bright green) State.NOTEMCC Cards will not enable without the CSM being INS.4Verify that the 19.6608 MHz CSM Clock is present; MCC Cards will not enable without it.SIf MCC Cards give “invalid or no System Time,” proceed to Step 5.NOTEBBX Cards should not be enabled for ATP Tests.5Verify that the CSM is enabled.6When all else fails, perform the following actions.6a Log out of the BTS.6b Exit the LMF.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Download – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-11PRELIMINARYTable 6-10: Device Enable (INS) Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenActionStep6c Restart the application.6d Log into the BTS.6e Re–attempt Device Enable Actions. LPA ErrorsTable 6-11: LPA ErrorsnStep Action1If the LPA Modules continuously report alarms, cycle power by resetting the applicable DC PDACircuit Breakers.2Establish an MMI Session with the LPA (Table 3-14), connecting the cable to the applicable MMIPort on the ETIB.2a Type alarms at the HyperTerminal Window Prompt and press Enter.– The resulting display may provide an indication of the problem.2b Call Field Support for further assistance.6
Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBay Level Offset CalibrationFailureTable 6-12: BLO Calibration Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the Power Meter or Communications System Analyzer is configured correctly.– Refer to the Test Equipment Set–up section of Chapter 3, and is connected to the proper BTSTX Antenna Connector.2If a Power Meter is being used, perform the following actions.2a Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with Cal Factors from the PowerSensor.– Refer to Appendix F.2b Verify that the Power Sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0 dBm)Power Ref Signal.2c Verify communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working by checking that the MeterDisplay is showing RES :3Verify that the parameters in the bts–#.cdf File are set correctly for the BTS Operating Band asfollows:For 1900 MHz:Bandclass = 1; Freq_Band = 16For 800 MHz:Bandclass = 0; Freq_Band = 84Verify that no LPA on the carrier is in Alarm State (rapidly flashing red LED).– If any LPAs are in Alarm State, proceed to Step 5.NOTEUnder normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).5Reset the LPA(s) by pulling the applicable circuit breaker on the DC PDA.6After 5 seconds, push the circuit breaker back in.7Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, proceed to Step 8.8Power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry the procedure. 6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-13PRELIMINARYCalibration Audit FailureTable 6-13: Calibration Audit Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the Power Meter or Communications System Analyzer is configured correctly.– Refer to the Test Equipment Set–up section of Chapter 3), and is connected to the proper BTSTX Antenna Connector.2If a Power Meter is being used, perform the following actions.2a Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with Cal Factors from the PowerSensor.– Refer to Appendix F.2b Verify that the Power Sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0 dBm)Power Ref Signal.2c Verify communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working by checking that the MeterDisplay is showing RES :.3Verify that no LPAs on the carrier are in Alarm State (rapidly flashing red LED).– If any LPAs are in Alarm State, proceed to Step 4.4Reset the LPA(s) by performing the following actions.4a Pull the applicable circuit breaker on the DC PDA, and,4b After 5 seconds, push the circuit breaker back in.5After Calibration, the BLO Data must be re-loaded to the BBX Cards before auditing.– Click on the BBX(s), and in the BTS Menu Bar select Device > Download >BLO.– Re-try the audit.6Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, proceed to Step 7.7Power Cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and re–try.8If Calibration is being performed for the Redundant BBX, ensure that the Single–Sided BLOCheck Box is not checked in the CDMA Test Parameters Test Set–up Window.9If additional items, such as Directional Couplers or Combiners, have been installed in the TXPath, make sure that one of the following has been done:SVerify BLO Check Box in the CDMA Test Parameters Test Set–up window is unchecked.SThe additional Path Losses have been added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit >TX Coupler Loss... Function. 6
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation 6-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYOverviewThe Optimization (RF Path Characterization or Calibration) andPost-Calibration (Audit) Procedures measure and limit-check the BTSreported Transmit and Receive Levels of the path from each BBX to theback of the frame. When a fault is detected, it is specific to a Receive orTransmit Path. The Troubleshooting Process in this section determinesthe most probable cause of the fault.As the Calibration and Audit Tests are performed, results are displayedin the LMF Test Status Report Window. When faults are encountered,the Test Procedure in progress continues running and displaying anyfurther faults. If it appears that there are major faults, the test can beaborted.The test results can be saved to a bts–#.rpt File in the<x>:\<lmf homedirectory \cdma\bts–# Folder. To do this, close the Test Status ReportWindow using the Save Results Button.Closing the Test Status Report Window with the DismissButton will delete the test results without saving them.NOTEIf a test is re–run or a new calibration, audit, or test is run and the resultsare saved, the previous test results in the bts–#.rpt File areoverwritten. To prevent losing previous test results in the bts–#.rptFile, refer to the procedure in Table 4-10 before performing furthertesting with the LMF.If there are major faults, recheck the Test Equipment Attachments forerrors. If none are found, close the Test Status Report Window using theSave Results Button, and save the contents of the resulting bts–#.rptfile as described in Table 4-10. Also, note other specifics about thefailure, and proceed with the Fault Isolation Procedure.If Every Test FailsIf all tests fail, perform the procedure in Table 6-14.Table 6-14: All Tests Fail Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Check the Calibration Equipment for proper operation by manually setting the Signal GeneratorOutput Attenuator to the lowest Output Power Setting.2Connect the Output Port to the Spectrum Analyzer RF Input Port.3Set the Signal Generator Output Attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the RF Output.4Verify that the Spectrum Analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct Signal Strength(accounting for the Cable Insertion Loss), and indicate the approximate frequency. 6
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-15PRELIMINARYVerify BLO Check BoxWhen performing a Calibration with the TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... Functions, the Verify BLO Check Box should normally bechecked. When a Calibration fails, determine if any items such asDirectional Couplers or Combiners have been added to the TX Path.If additional items have been installed in the path, try re–running theCalibration with Verify BLO unchecked. If Calibration still does notpass, refer to the following paragraphs and use the TX Output FaultIsolation Flowchart to identify the most probable cause of the failure.Single–Sided BLO Check BoxWhen performing a Calibration with the TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... Functions, the Single–Sided BLO Check Box should notbe checked when the Redundant BBX is being calibrated. When aCalibration fails with the Redundant BBX selected, try re–running theCalibration with the Single–Sided BLO Check Box unchecked.– If the Calibration still fails, refer to the following paragraphs anduse the TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart to identify the mostprobable cause of the failure.If Faults Are IsolatedIf the Fault Reports are isolated between successful Path Checks, theroot cause of the faults most likely lies with one or more of the FieldReplaceable Unit (FRU) cards/modules.– If more than one failure was reported, look for a commondenominator in the data. For example, if any TX Test fails on onesector only, the BBX assigned to that sector (Table 1-5) is a likelycause. Also, look at the Severity of the failure.– If the Path Loss is just marginally out of the relaxed specificationlimit during the Post-Calibration TX Audit, suspect excessive TestCable Insertion Loss.– If limits are missed by a wide margin, suspect incorrectly wiredcables or total device failure.Use the TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart in Figure 6-1 to identifythe strongest possible cause for a failed TX Test.Fault Isolation FlowchartThe flowchart covers the Transmit Path.– Transmit Paths usually fail the lower Test Limit, indicatingexcessive Loss in some component in the BTS Site or incorrectwiring.– A failure of an upper Test Limit usually indicates a problem withthe Test Set–up or external equipment.Before replacing a suspected FRU, always repeat and verify that the testresults to rule out a transient condition. If a BBX fails an Upper Limit inthe Post–Calibration Audit Procedure, re–calibrate and verify that theout–of–tolerance condition for that BBX and/or sector beforereplacement.6
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation – continued 6-16 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYFlowchart PrerequisitesBefore entering the Fault Isolation Sequence shown in the flowchart,ensure that the following items have been completed:SGLI Cards, MCC Cards, and BBX Cards have been downloaded withthe correct ROM Code, RAM Code, and data (Table 3-16, Table 3-17,and Table 3-18).SMGLI, CSM Cards, and MCC Cards are enabled (Table 3-17,Table 3-20, and Table 3-21, respectively).SEnsure that the LED on the correct CCD Card is solid green.SEnsure no alarms are being reported by opening an LMF AlarmWindow as outlined in WinLMF On-Line Help SR2.16.x .6
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-17PRELIMINARYTX Power Output FaultIsolation FlowchartStartTX PowerOut of LimitsNoNo, everything failsIf equipped, does aBBX on a differentcarrier but for thesame sector pass?Yes, it passes.Likely Cause: Crossed TX cabling to include:– CIO–Trunking Module,– TrunkingModule–Filter/Combiner,– Filter/Combiner–DRDC/TRDCCarrier LPA ModulesAlso check: Carrier Trunking ModuleCIO Card.Did TX Outputfail the High or Low limit?High limitfailure. DoesRedundant BBXhave the sameproblem on thesame sector?Likely Cause: BBX Card Attempt re–Calibrationbefore replacement.NoDoes any othersector have thesame problem?Likely Cause: CIO CardCarrier Trunking ModuleAlso check: CIO–Trunking Module cablingTX Filter/Combiner cablingTX DRDC/TRDC cablingLikely Cause: External Power MeasurementEquipment and/or Set–up.Also check: Switch CardExternal Attenuators & Pads,Check Site Documentation.YesYesLow limitfailure.Likely Cause: CIO Card not fully seatedExternal Power MeasurementEquipment and/or Set–upCrossed TX cabling to include:– CIO–Trunking Module,– TrunkingModule–Filter/Combiner,– Filter/Combiner–DRDC/TRDCYes, it passes.If equipped, does aBBX on the samecarrier but for adifferent sectorpass?No, next BBX on same carrierfails on different sector.Likely Cause: BBX CardLoose connections onCIO–Trunking Module cabling,TX Filter/Combiner cabling, orTX DRDC/TRDC cablingAlso check: CIO CardCarrier Trunking ModuleFigure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-18 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBTS Passed Reduced ATPTests but Has Forward LinkProblem in Normal OperationPerform the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a Forward Linkproblem during normal operation after passing a reduced ATP.Table 6-15: Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Perform the following additional tests to troubleshoot a Forward Link problem:1a – TX Mask1b – TX Rho1c – TX Code DomainCannot Perform TX MaskMeasurementTable 6-16: TX Mask Measurement Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the TX Audit passes for the BBX(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify that the analyzer is set–up correctly.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in Alarm State (flashing red LED).4Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or PilotTime Offset MeasurementTable 6-17: Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify the presence of the RF Signal by switching to the Spectrum Analyzer Screen.2Verify that the PN Offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN Offset in the CDF File.3Re–load MGLI Code and Data, and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify that the analyzer is set–up correctly.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in Alarm State (flashing red LED).6Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-19PRELIMINARYTable 6-17: Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenActionStep7If the Rho Value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), it may indicate that theGPS is still Phasing (trying to reach and maintain 0 Frequency Error).7a Go to the Frequency Bar in the upper right corner of the Rho Meter and select Hz.7b Press <Shift–avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho Value.– This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to bere-initialized. Cannot Perform Code DomainPower and Noise FloorMeasurementTable 6-18: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify the presence of the RF Signal by switching to the Spectrum Analyzer Screen on theCommunications System Analyzer.2Verify that the PN Offset displayed on analyzer is the same as the PN Offset being used in theCDF File.3Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCC Cards based on the extent of the failure). 6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-20 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYMulti–FER Test FailureTable 6-19: Multi-FER Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify that the Test Equipment is configured correctly for an FER Test.2Verify that the Test Equipment is locked to the 19.6608 MHz and Even Second Clocks.– On the HP 8921 Analyzer, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify MCC Cards have been loaded with data and are INS_ACTIVE.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on the extent of the failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCC Cards based on extentof failure).6Verify that the Antenna Connections to the frame are correct based on the LMF DirectionsMessages. 6
Troubleshooting: CSM ChecklistFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-21PRELIMINARYProblem DescriptionMany Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Card problems may beresolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.This section describes known CSM problems identified in Field Returns,some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM Cards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHzReference Clock / GPSReceiver Operation If problems are occurring with CSM Card Kit Numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the Suffix with the Kit Number. If the Kit Numberhas version “AB,” then replace it with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, andreturn the Model AB CSM Card to the Repair Center.No GPS Reference SourceCorrect HardwareCheck the CSM Cards for proper hardware configuration for the type ofGPS in use and the SCCP Cage Slot where they are installed.RF–GPS (Local GPS) – CSM Kit Number SGLN1145, which shouldbe installed in Slot l, has an on-board GPS Receiver; while Kit NumberSGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS Receiver..Remote GPS (RGPS) – Kit Number SGLN4132ED or later, whichshould be installed in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPSReceiver..Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the Repair Center.Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field.– Also, verify that the GPS Antenna is not damaged and is installedper recommended guidelines.Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSMCard back to the Repair Center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSMSoftware (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by anearlier version of CSM Software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded fromthe CBSC. Download again with CSM Software Code 3.5 or higher.Return the CSM Card back to the Repair Center if the attempt to reloadfails.6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued 6-22 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCSM Reference SourceConfiguration Error This problem is caused by an incorrect Reference (Clock) SourceConfiguration performed in the field by software download. CSM KitNumbers SGLN1145 and SGLN4132 must have the proper ReferenceSources configured, as shown in Table 6-20, to function correctly.Table 6-20: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and Kit NumberGPS Type CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source ConfigurationRF GPSSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = HSORF GPSSGLN4132 Without GPSReceiver 2Primary = Mate GPSBackup = HSOREMOTE SGLN4132ED Without GPS 1Primary = Remote GPSBackup = HSOREMOTEGPSSGLN4132EDor laterWithout GPSReceiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = HSOTakes Too Long for CSM toCome INSThis problem may be caused by a delay in GPS Acquisition. Check theAccuracy Flag Status and/or current position. Refer to the CSM SystemTime/GPS and HSO Verification section of Chapter 3.At least one satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed”Mode, and four satellites should be visible and tracked for the“estimated” Mode. Also, verify that the correct Base Site Position Datais being used in “surveyed” Mode.6
Troubleshooting: SCCP BackplaneFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-23PRELIMINARYIntroductionThe SCCP Backplane is a multi–layer printed circuit board thatinterconnects all of the SCCP Cards and Modules. The complexity ofthis board lends itself to possible improper diagnoses when problemsoccur.Connector FunctionalityThe following Connector Overview describes the major types ofBackplane Connectors along with the functionality of each. This willassist the CFE to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.Span Line ConnectorThe 50–pin Span Line Connector provides a primary and secondary (ifused) Span Line Interface to each GLI in the SCCP Cage. The Span Lineis used for MM/EMX Switch Control of the Master GLI and also all ofthe BBX Traffic.Power Input (Return A and B Connectors)Provides 27 Volt Input for use by the Power Supply Modules.Power Supply Module InterfaceEach Power Supply Module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP Backplane. These are:– VCC/Ground Input Connector– Harting–style Multiple Pin Interface– +15V Analog Ground Output ConnectorThe Transceiver Power Module converts 27 Volts to a regulated +15,+6.5, +5.0 Volts to be used by the SCCP Cage Cards.GLI ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU Digital Connector and a6–conductor COAXial Connector for RDM Distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLI Cards in the SCCP Backplane.GLI Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese SMB Connectors are located on the SCCP Backplane and connectto the GLI Card. This interface provides all the Control and DataCommunications over the Ethernet LAN between the Master GLI, theRedundant GLI, and the LMF.BBX ConnectorEach BBX Connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU Digital Connectorand two 6–conductor COAXial Connectors. These connectors provideDC, Digital, and RF Inputs/Outputs for the BBX Cards in the SCCPBackplane.6
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane – continued 6-24 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCIO ConnectorsSRF RX Antenna Path Signal Inputs are routed through RX Paths ofthe DRDCs or TRDCs at the RF Interface Panel (rear of the frame),and through COAXial Cables to the two MPC Cards.The three “A” (Main) Signals go to one MPC; the three “B”(Diversity) Signals to the other. The MPC outputs thelow–noise–amplified signals through the SCCP Backplane to the CIOwhere the signals are split and sent to the appropriate BBX.SA Digital Bus then routes the Baseband Signal through the BBX, tothe SCCP Backplane, and then on to the MCC Slots.SDigital TX Antenna Path Signals originate at the MCC Cards. Eachoutput is routed from the MCC Slot through the SCCP Backplane tothe appropriate BBX.STX RF Path Signal originates from the BBX, travels through theSCCP Backplane to the CIO, through the CIO, and then throughmulti-conductor COAXial Cabling to the Trunking Module and LPAModules in the LPA Shelf.SCCP BackplaneTroubleshooting ProcedureThe following tables provide standard procedures for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP Backplane. Thetables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.All steps in all tables should be followed before anyattempt to replace the SCCP Backplane.NOTE6
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-25PRELIMINARYDigital Control ProblemsNo GLI Control via LMF (all GLI Cards)Table 6-21: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLI Cards)nStep Action1Check the Ethernet LAN for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.2Ensure that the LAN IN and OUT Connectors in the Power Entry Compartment are properlyterminated.3Ensure that the proper IP Address is entered in the Network Login Tab of the LMF Login Screen.4Logout and exit from the LMF.5Restart the LMF.6Login to the BTS again.7Verify SCCP Backplane Shelf ID DIP Switch is set correctly.8Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.9Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI Cards)Table 6-22: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLI Cards)nStep Action1Verify that the SCCP Backplane Shelf ID DIP Switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLI Cards are correctly configured in the OMC–R/CBSC Database.3Verify that the Span Configurations set in the GLI Cards match those in the OMC–R/CBSCDatabase.– Refer to Table 6-47.4Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.5Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.6Check the Span Line Cabling from the Punchblock to the Master GLI for proper connection anddamage.Table 6-23: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLInStep Action1Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMC–R/CBSC Database.2Check the Ethernet Connections for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.3Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.6
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane – continued 6-26 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNo AMR Control (MGLI good)Table 6-24: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMRnStep Action1Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.2Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX Control in the ShelfTable 6-25: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBX CardsnStep Action1Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check BBX Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficTable 6-26: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficnStep Action1Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check all Span Line Distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) MCC24E/MCC8E Channel ElementsTable 6-27: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel ElementsnStep Action1Verify Channel Elements on a co–located MCC of the same type. (CDF MccType Codes: MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC–1X = 3)2Check MCC Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.3If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the sametype.4If no Channel Elements are active on any MCC, verify the Clock Reference to the CIO.6
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-27PRELIMINARYDC Power ProblemsPotentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed tothe BTS Equipment.This test must be carried out with a second person present,acting in a safety role.Remove all rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior tobeginning this test.WARNINGNo DC Input Voltage to SCCP Cage Power Supply ModulesTable 6-28: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Verify the DC Power is applied to the BTS Frame.2Determine if any circuit breakers have tripped.SIf a breaker has tripped, proceed to Step 3.SIf breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or subassembly within the SCCPCage.– Perform the tests in Table 2-2 to attempt to isolate the module.3Remove all cards and modules from the SCCP Cage.4Reset the circuit breaker.SIf it does reset, proceed to Step 5.SIf it does not reset or trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frameor DC PDA.5Verify that the PS1 and PS2 Circuit Breakers on the DC PDA are functional.6Remove the BTS Frame Rear Access Panel (Figure 2-2), and use a voltmeter to determine if theInput Voltage is being routed to the SCCP Backplane.Measure the DC Voltage Levels between:SThe PWR_IN_A and PWR_RTN_A Contacts on the extreme right side at the rear of thebackplane.SThe PWR_IN_B and PWR_RTN_B Contacts on the extreme right side at the rear of thebackplane.NOTEIf the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or circuit breaker problem within the frameor DC PDA.7If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the PS1 and PS2 Power Supply ModuleConnectors.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane – continued 6-28 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-28: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module Troubleshooting ProcedurenActionStep8Replace the Power Supply Modules with known good modules.9If Steps 1 through 7 fail to indicate a problem, an SCCP Backplane failure has occurred (possiblyan open trace). No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI, BBX,or Switch ModuleTable 6-29: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Cage Module Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1If it has not been done, perform the procedure in Table 6-28.2Inspect the SCCP Cage Card Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.3Replace suspect cards with known good cards. TX and RX Signal RoutingProblemsTable 6-30: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable Connectors and Backplane Connectors for damage in all the affectedcard slots.2Perform the steps outlined in the RF Path Troubleshooting Flowchart in Figure 6-1. 6
Troubleshooting: RFDSFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-29PRELIMINARYIntroductionThe RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification andPost-Calibration Audits that limit-check the RFDS-generate andreported Receive Levels of every path from the RFDS through theDirectional Coupler Coupled Paths. In the event of test failure, refer tothe following tables.All Tests FailTable 6-31: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail Troubleshooting ProcedureStep Action1Check the TX Calibration Equipment for proper operation by performing the following actions.1a Manually set the Signal Generator Output Attenuator to the lowest Output Power Setting.1b Connect the Output Port to the Spectrum Analyzer RF Input Port.2Set the Signal Generator Output Attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the RF Output.3Verify that the Spectrum Analyzer can do the following:– Receive the signal.– Indicate the correct Signal Strength (accounting for the Cable Insertion Loss).– Indicate the approximate frequency.4Visually inspect the RF Cabling.Make sure that the Directional Coupler Forward Port and Reflected Port are connected to the RFDSAntenna Select Unit on the RFDS.5Check the wiring against the Site Documentation Wiring Diagram or the 1X SC4812T Lite HardwareInstallation manual (68P09262A57)6Verify that all changes to the RFDS Parameter Settings have been downloaded.7Status the TSU to verify that the TSIC and SUA Software Versions are correct.8Check to see that all RFDS Cards show green on the Front Panel LEDs.9Visually check for external damage.10 If any card LEDs do not show green, replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.– Re–test after replacement. All RX and TX Paths FailIf every Receive or Transmit Path fails, the problem most likely lies withthe RF Converter Card or the Transceiver Card. Replace the RFDS witha known–good unit and retest.6
Troubleshooting: RFDS – continued 6-30 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAll Tests Fail on a SingleAntennaIf all path failures are on one Antenna Port (Forward or Reflected),perform the checks in Table 6-32.Table 6-32: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path Troubleshooting ProcedureStep Action1Visually inspect the frame internal RFDS Cabling to the suspect TRDC or DRDC.2Verify that the Forward and Reflected Ports connect to the correct RFDS Antenna Select Unitpositions on the RFDS ASU Card.– Refer to the RFDS Installation Manual for details.3Replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.4Replace the RF Cables between the affected TRDC or DRDC and the RFDS. 6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and ConnectorsFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-31PRELIMINARYModule Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive Plug-in Cards/Modules has a bi-color (green andred) Status Indicator LED located on the card/module Front Panel. TheLED is labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicatorappears yellow.Each plug-in card/module, except for the Fan Module, has its own Alarm(Fault) Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALMLED.The Fan TACH Signal of each Fan Module is monitored by the AMRCard. Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state ofthe PWR/ALM LED on the Fan Module.Module LED Status (exceptGLI3, CSM, BBX, MCC)PWR/ALM LEDTable 6-33 describes the states of the Card/Module Status IndicatorLEDs.Table 6-33: Card/Module PWR/ALM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN NORMAL (Fault–Free) Mode– No alarm present.Solid RED Alarm (Fault) Mode due to electrical or hardwarefailure.– An alarm is being reported.Note that an Alarm (Fault) Indication may or may not be due to acomplete card/module failure and normal service may or may not bereduced or interrupted.Power Supply Module LEDStatus CombinationsThe Power Supply Module (PWR CNVTR) has its own Alarm (Fault)Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.PWR/ALM LEDTable 6-34 describes the states of the bi-color Status Indicator LED.Table 6-34: Card/Module PWR/ALM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN NORMAL (Fault–Free) Mode– No alarm present.Solid RED Alarm (Fault) Mode due to electrical or hardwarefailure.– An alarm is being reported.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-32 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCSM LED Status Combinations PWR/ALM LEDThe CSM Cards contain on-board Alarm Detection. Hardware andSoftware/Firmware Alarms are indicated via the Front Panel LEDs.Refer to Table 6-35.After the Memory Tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM Code from theFlash EPROM, if available.– If not available, the OOS–ROM Code is loaded from the FlashEPROM.Table 6-35: CSM Card PWR/ALM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN Master CSM is locked on to the GPS orLFR while operating in INS_ACTIVE orINS_STANDBY Mode.– No alarm present.Solid RED 1. Color during System Initialization.2. Alarm (Fault) Mode– An alarm is being reported.Fast Flashing GREEN Standby CSM is locked on to the GPS orLFR while in INS_STANDBY Mode.– No alarm present.AlternatingSlow Flashing RED/Fast Flashing GREENOOS_ROM Mode– An alarm is being reported.Fast Flashing GREEN 1. OOS_RAM Mode2. INS_ACTIVE Mode in DUMBConfiguration.– No alarm present.AlternatingFast Flashing RED/Fast Flashing GREENOOS_RAM Mode– An alarm is being reported.AlternatingFast Flashing RED/Slow FlashingGREENOOS_RAM Mode and attempting to lockon to the GPS Signal.– An alarm is being reported.table continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-33PRELIMINARYTable 6-35: CSM Card PWR/ALM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid YELLOW After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot.Color during the SRAM Test and the FlashEPROM Code Check Test.– If SRAM or Flash EPROM Tests fail,the LED changes to Steady RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.OFF 1. No DC Power to the card.2. The on-board fuse is open. FREQ Monitor ConnectorA Test Port provided on the CSM Front Panel via a BNC Receptacleallows monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz Clock Signal generated by theCSM. When both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS)condition, the CSM 2 Clock Signal Frequency is the same as that outputby CSM 1.The Clock Signal is a Sine Wave Signal with a Minimum Amplitude of+2 dBm (800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω Load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA Test Port provided at the CSM Front Panel via a BNC Receptacleallows monitoring of the “Even Second Clock” Reference Signalgenerated by the CSM Cards.At this port, the Reference Signal is a Transistor–Transistor Logic (TTL)Active–High Signal with a Pulse Width of 153 nanoseconds.MMI ConnectorBehind the Front Panel – only accessible when the card is partiallyextended from its SCCP Cage Slot. The RS–232 MMI Port Connector isintended to be used primarily in the development or factoryenvironment, but may be used in the field for Debug/Maintenancepurposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-34 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYPWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel LED and Monitor PortsGLI3 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI3 Card Indicators, Controls, and Connectors are described belowand shown in Figure 6-3.The Front Panel Indicators and Controls consist of:SFour LEDsSOne PushbuttonACTIVE LEDTable 6-36: GLI Card ACTIVE LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN INS_ACTIVE Mode– This indication means that the GLI has ShelfControl and is providing control of thedigital interfaces.OFF Not Active (i.e., INS_STANDBY).– The Mate GLI is INS_ACTIVE andoperating normally.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-35PRELIMINARYMASTER LEDTable 6-37: GLI Card MASTER LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN GLI is Master (also referred to as MGLI).– The GLI Card located in the Top Shelf isdesignated by hardware as theINS_ACTIVE GLI Card.– The GLI Card located in the Bottom Shelf isdesignated by hardware as theINS_STANDBY GLI Card.OFF GLI is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARM LEDTable 6-38: GLI Card ALARM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSlow FlashingGREEN INS_ACTIVE or INS_STANDBY Mode.Solid GREEN Turns ON briefly during System Initializationwhen the STATUS LED turns OFF.OFF GLI is operating normally.STATUS LEDTable 6-39: GLI Card STATUS LED StatesLED State Device StatusSlow FlashingGREEN INS_ACTIVE or INS_STANDBYSolid GREEN Turns ON briefly during System Initializationwhen the ALARM LED turns OFF.OFF GLI is operating normally.SPANS LEDTable 6-40: GLI Card STATUS LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN GLI is operating normally.Solid YELLOW One or more of the equipped initialized SpanLines is receiving a Remote Alarm IndicationSignal from the Remote End of the Span Line.table continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-36 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-40: GLI Card STATUS LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid RED One or more of the equipped initialized SpanLines is in Alarm Mode.OFF GLI is powered down, in Initialization Mode, orin INS_STANDBY Mode. GLI3 Pushbutton andConnectorsFigure 6-3 shows the Front Panel of the GLI3 Card and includes adescription of the components.RESET PushbuttonDepressing the RESET Pushbutton causes a partial reset of the CPU anda reset of all board devices. GLI3 will be placed in the OOS_ROM state(blue).MMI ConnectorThe RS–232MMI Port Connector is intended primarily for developmentor factory use but may be used in the field for Debug/Maintenancepurposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-37PRELIMINARYSTATUS OFF − operating normally.ON − briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (inĆservice).RESETALARM OFF − operating normally.ON − briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (inĆservice).BPR ASpanACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSPressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails.ON − active card operating normally.OFF − standby card operating normally.Connects to either a BPR or Expansion Cage and is wired as anEthernet hub.An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.BPR BGLIAUXSupports the cross−coupled Ethernet circuits to the Mate GLI using astandard Ethernet straight cable.Wired as an Ethernet hub for direct connection to a personal computĆer with a standard Ethernet cable. It allows connection of an Ethernetsniffer" when the Ethernet switch is properly configured for port monĆitoring. This port may also be connected to the optional MotorolaMOSCAD−L Network Fault Management unit using a CrossoverEthernet cable.Connects to either a BPR or Expansion Cage and is wired as anEthernet hub.MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE–Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE–TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE–T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion PortSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwOFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby.GREEN − operating normally.YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far end.RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstate.MMIFigure 6-3: GLI3 Front PanelBBX LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDAll Broadband Transceiver (BBX) Cards have their own Alarm (Fault)Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.Table 6-41 describes the states of the bi-color PWR/ALM LED.Table 6-41: BBX Card PWR/ALM LED StatesPhysical and Alarm State Off Red GreenMicroprocessor in Reset ––– Continuous –––OOS–ROM – No alarm 1.4s ––– 0.2sOOS–ROM – Alarm ––– 1.4s 0.2sOOS–RAM – No alarm 0.2s ––– 0.2s6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-38 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-41: BBX Card PWR/ALM LED StatesPhysical and Alarm State GreenRedOffOOS–RAM – Alarm ––– 0.2s 0.2sIn Service – No alarm ––– ––– ContinuousIn Service – Alarm ––– 0.2s 1.4sACTIVE LEDTable 6-42 describes the states of the ACTIVE LED:Table 6-42: BBX Card ACTIVE LED StatesPhysical and Alarm State Off Red GreenDekeyed Continuous ––– –––Keyed ––– ––– ContinuousMCC LED Status CombinationsThe Multi-Channel CDMA (MCC–24/MCC–8E/MCC–1X) Card hasStatus Indicator LEDs and Connectors as described below. Refer toFigure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectors; they areconcealed by the removable lens. The location of the LEDs are asfollows:SPWR/ALM LED is at the top of the card.SACTIVE LED is at the bottom of the card.PWR/ALM LEDTable 6-43: MCC Card PWR/ALM LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid RED 1. Briefly lit during System Initialization.2. Alarm (Fault) Mode.– An alarm is being reported.OFF Operating normally.ACTIVE LEDTable 6-44: MCC Card ACTIVE LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN Card is code–loaded, enabled, and operatingin INS_ACTIVE Mode, on-line, processingtraffic.– No alarm present.Slow Flashing GREEN Card is not code–loaded.– No alarm present.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-39PRELIMINARYTable 6-44: MCC Card ACTIVE LED StatesLED State Device StatusFast Flashing GREEN Card is code–loaded but not enabled.– No alarm present.Solid RED Alarm (Fault) Mode.– An alarm is being reported.AlternatingSlow Flashing RED / Slow Flashing GREENThe CHI Bus is inactive after SystemInitialization.OFF 1. Card is inactive.2. Card is off-line.3. Card is not processing traffic.Both PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsTable 6-45: MCC Card PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LED StatesLED State Device StatusSolid RED 1. Card is in Reset Mode.2. The BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsRS–232 Port Connector: This Port Connector (four pin) is intended to be used primarily inDevelopment and Factory environments, but may be used in the field forDebugging purposes.– A Removable Lens covers this Port Connector.The RJ–14 Ethernet Port Connector: This Port Connector (eight pin) is intended to be used primarily in theDevelopment environment, but may be used in the field for High DataRate Debugging purposes.– A Removable Lens covers this Port Connector.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-40 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYPWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSCOLORAn alarm is generated in the event of a failure2) Continuously during fault conditionsON – 1) Briefly during Power–upSLOW FLASHING (alternately with green) –Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) Businactive on Power–upREDREDGREENACTIVEPWR/ALM OFF – Operating normallyON – Briefly during Power–up and duringfailure conditionsRAPIDLY FLASHING – Card is Code Loaded butnot enabledON – Card is Code Loaded and enabled (INS_ACT)SLOW FLASHING – Card is not Code Loaded4812ETL0030–1Figure 6-4: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED IndicationsCLPA LED StatusCombinationsETIB Board LED for the LPA ModuleIn the SC 4812T Lite Platform, the CLPA Module does not contain anLEDs. The LED on the CLPA Fan Module provides visual operationalinformation for the CLPA Module. Refer to Figure 6-5.Each LPA Module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB Modulenext to the MMI Connector. Refer to Table 6-46.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-41PRELIMINARYTable 6-46: LPA ETIB Module LEDLED State Device StatusSolid GREEN INS_ACTIVE Mode– No alarm present.Alternating Flashing GREEN/ RED INS_ACTIVE ModeSIf a BBX is keyed, a Low PowerAlarm is present.SIf a BBX is not keyed, no alarm ispresent.Flashing RED Alarm (Fault) Mode– An LPA Alarm is being reported.Figure 6-5: CLPA ModuleTOPCLPAMODULEBOTTOMCLPAMODULEFANMODULE6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link 6-42 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYSpan Problems (No ControlLink)Table 6-47: Control Link Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1Connect the LMF Computer to the MMI Port on the applicable MGLI3/GLI3 as shown inFigure 6-6.2Start an MMI Communication Session with the applicable MGLI3/GLI3 by using the WindowsDesktop Shortcut Icon.– Refer to Table 3-14.3Once the connection window opens, press the LMF Computer Enter Key until the GLI3>Prompt is obtained.4At the GLI3> Prompt, enter:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of Span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for Span Equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 Spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default Link Speed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI Spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC Span Configuration requires it.5The Span Configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMC–R/CBSC Database forthe BTS.SIf they do, proceed to Step 6.SIf they do not, proceed to Table 6-48.6Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLI Cards.7If the Span Settings are correct, verify the EDLC Parameters using the show Command.– Check for any Alarm Conditions that indicate the Span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the Span Line from the DSX Panel to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for a Control Tone on the appropriate Timeslot from the Base Site and MM.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-43PRELIMINARYTable 6-47: Control Link Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenActionStep8Exit the GLI MMI Session and HyperTerminal Connection by performing the following actions.8a Select File from the Connection Window Menu Bar.8b Select Exit from the Pull–down Menu. NULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE (P/N30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINLMFCOMPUTERTo MMI PortDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonFigure 6-6: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-44 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYSet BTS Site SpanConfigurationPerform the following procedure ONLY if SpanConfigurations loaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not matchthose in the OMC–R/CBSC database, AND ONLY whenthe exact Configuration Data is available.Loading incorrect Span Configuration Data will render thesite inoperable.NOTETable 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration ProcedurenStep Action1If not previously done, connect the LMF Computer to the MMI Port on the applicableMGLI3/GLI3 as shown in Figure 6-6.2If there is no MMI Communication Session in progress with the applicable MGLI3/GLI3, initiateone by using the Windows Desktop Shortcut Icon.– Refer to Table 3-14.3At the GLI3> Prompt, enter the following commandGLI3>config ni format <option> <cr> – The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST – option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) Spans will be set to the same format.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-45PRELIMINARYTable 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration ProcedurenActionStep4To set or change the Span Type, enter the correct option from the list at the Entry Prompt (>), asshown in the following example.> T1_2 <cr> – An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI3>NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list.– If the entry is typed incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI3>5If the current MGLI/GLI Span Rate must be changed, enter the following MMI Command:config ni Link Speed <cr> – The terminal will display a response similar to the following:Next available options: LIST – Link Speed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other Span Configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) Spans will be set to the same Link Speed.6To set or change the Span Link Speed, enter the required option from the list at the Entry Prompt(>), as shown in the following example:> 64K <cr>– An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI3>NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list.– If the entry is typed incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI3>table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-46 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration ProcedurenActionStep7If the Span Equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI Command:config ni equal <cr>– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal Span equal Next available options: LIST – Span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>8At the Entry Prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the Span to be changed as shown inthe following example:> a <cr>– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal Next available options: LIST – equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132–262 feet 2 : 263–393 feet 3 : 394–524 feet 4 : 525–655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)>9At the Entry Prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example:> 0 <cr>– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI3>10 Repeat Step 7 through Step 9 for each in–use Span.table continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 6-47PRELIMINARYTable 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration ProcedurenActionStep11 Press the RESET Button on the MGLI3/GLI3 for changes to take effect.* IMPORTANTAfter executing the config ni format, config ni Link Speed, and/or config ni equalcommands, the affected MGLI/GLI Card MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult the Site Documentation for Span Type and LinkSpeed used at the site.12 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify Span Settings are asrequired:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of Span view command)– The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – 0–131 feet Span B – 0–131 feet Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64K The actual rate is 0SIf the Span Configuration is correct, return to Step 6 of Table 6-47.SIf the Span Configuration is not correct, proceed to Step 13.13 Perform the applicable step from this table to change it.14 Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 to verify required changes have been programmed. 6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-48 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotes6
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix A: Data Sheets Appendix ContentOptimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Serial Number Check List A-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Cage A-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Modules A-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data SheetsFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-1PRELIMINARYVerification of Test EquipmentUsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued A-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYSite ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Deliveries Per establishedprocedures−Floor Plan Verified−−−Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure−−−Factory Data:BBXTest PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure−Site Temperature−Dress Covers/BracketsPreliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments−Frame ID DIP Switches Per SiteEquipage−Ethernet LANVerification Verified perprocedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-3PRELIMINARYPre–Power and Initial PowerTestsTable A-4: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Pre–Power–up Tests Table 2-2−−−−−−−−−−Internal Cables:SpanCSMPowerEthernet Connectors:LAN A OhmsLAN B OhmsLAN A ShieldLAN B ShieldLAN A IN & OUTTerminatorsLAN B IN & OUTTerminatorsEthernet BootsVerifiedVerifiedVerifiedVerifiedVerifiedInstalledInstalledIsolatedIsolatedInstalled−Air Impedance Cage (single cage) Installed−Initial Power–up Tests Table 2-5−−Frame FansLEDsOperationalIlluminatedComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued A-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYGeneral Optimization ChecklistTable A-5: General Optimization ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−−−Preparing the LMFLoad LMF SoftwareCreate site–specific BTS directoryCreate HyperTerminal ConnectionTable 3-2Table 3-3Table 3-4−−−−LMF–to–BTS ConnectionVerify GLI2 Ethernet Address SettingsPing LAN APing LAN BTable 3-6Table 6-4Table 3-15Table 3-15−−−−−−−−−Verify ROM Code Loads for SoftwareReleaseDownload/Enable MGLI2Download/Enable GLI2Set Site Span ConfigurationSet CSM Clock SourceEnable CSM CardsDownload/Enable MCC Cards (24/8E/1X)Download BBX Cards (2 or 1X)Program TSU NAMTable 3-16Table 3-17Table 3-17Table 6-47Table 3-19Table 3-20Table 3-18Table 3-18Table 3-52−−Test Set CalibrationTest Cable CalibrationTable 3-36Table 3-32 Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-5PRELIMINARYGPS Receiver OperationTable A-6: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments−GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter−Initial Position Accuracy: Verify: Estimated orSurveyed−Current Position:latlonheightRECORD inmsec and cm.Also convert todeg min sec.−Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate−GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter−Current Reference Source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued A-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYLPA IM Reduction Table A-7: LPA IM ReductionParameterCarrierOK LPA#2:13–Sector BP3–Sector Specification Comments−1A C1 C1 No Alarms−1B C1 C1 No Alarms−1C C1 C1 No Alarms−1D C1 C1 No Alarms−3A C2 C2 No Alarms−3B C2 C2 No Alarms−3C C2 C2 No Alarms−3D C2 C2 No AlarmsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-7PRELIMINARYTX Bay Level Offset / PowerOutput Verification for3–Sector Configurations One Carrier and Two Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-8: TX BLO Calibration (Three Sector: One Carrier and Two Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB−Calibrate Carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB(+5 dB) prior to CalibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB−BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB−BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB−Calibrate Carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB(+5 dB) prior to CalibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB−BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB−BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB−Calibration AuditCarrier 1 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain SetResolution Post–CalibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB−BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB−BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB−Calibration AuditCarrier 2 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain SetResolution Post–CalibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB−BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued A-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTwo Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (Three Sector: Two Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB−Calibrate Carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to CalibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB−BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB−BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB−Calibrate Carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to CalibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB−BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB−BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB−Calibration AuditCarrier 1 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set ResolutionPost–CalibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB−BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB−BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB−Calibration AuditCarrier 2 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set ResolutionPost–CalibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB−BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-9PRELIMINARYTX Antenna VSWRTable A-10: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 1B < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2B < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3B < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________RX Antenna VSWRTable A-11: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3A < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 1B < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2B < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3B < (1.5 : 1)Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued A-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAlarm VerificationTable A-12: CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data−Verify CDI AlarmInput Operation. BTS Relay #XX –Contact Alarm Sets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Serial Number Check ListFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP A-11PRELIMINARYDate SiteSCCP CageFor BBX Cards and MCC Cards, enter the type as well asSerial Number; for example, BBX2, BBX–1X, MCC8,MCC24, MCC–1X.NOTESite I/O ASite I/O BSCCP CageCSM–1CSM–2HSOCCD–1CCD–2AMR–1AMR–2MPC–1MPC–2Fan–1Fan–2GLI2–1GLI2–2GLI2–2BBX–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–R1MCC–1MCC–2MCC–3A
Site Serial Number Check List – continued A-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYMCC–4CIOSWITCHPS–1PS–2LPA ModulesPA 1APA 1BPA 1CPA 1DPA 3APA 3BPA 3CPA 3DA
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information Appendix ContentPN Offset Programming Information B-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Background B-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Usage B-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesB
PN Offset Programming InformationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-1PRELIMINARYPN Offset BackgroundAll Channel Elements transmitted from a BTS in a specific 1.25 MHzCDMA Channel are orthogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh CodeFunctions; additionally, they are also spread by a Quadrature Pair of PNSequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) Sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN Offset per Sector is stored on the BBX Cards, where thecorresponding I and Q Registers reside.The PN Offset Values are determined by BTS Sector (Antenna) based onthe applicable CDF Data Field Content. A breakdown of thisinformation is found in Table B-1.PN Offset Usage There are three basic RF Chip Delays currently in use. It is important todetermine which RF Chip Delay is valid to be able to test the BTSFunctionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF FineTxAdjValue was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with “imagedata”.The FineTxAdj Value is used to compensate for the Processing Delay(approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meetingIS–97 Specifications.Observe the following guidelines:SIf the FineTxAdj Value in the CDF is 101 (65 HEX), the FineTxAdjhas not been set. The I and Q Values from the 0 Chip Delay Columnof Table B-1 MUST be used.If the FineTxAdj Value in the CDF File is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdjhas been set for the 14 Chip Delay column of Table B-1.SIf the FineTxAdj value in the CDF File is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdjhas been set for the 13Chip Delay column of Table B-1.CDF File I and Q Values can be represented in DECIMALor HEX.If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX Value.If necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimalbefore comparing them to CDF File I and Q ValueAssignments.NOTE– If a Qualcomm Mobile is used, select I and Q Values from the13–Chip Delay column of Table B-1.– If a mobile is used that does not have the “One Chip Offset”problem (any mobile meeting the IS–97 Specification), select fromthe 14–Chip Delay column of Table B-1.B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYIf the wrong I and Q Values are used with the wrongFineTxAdj Parameter, System Timing problems willoccur.This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”over several Walsh Codes (instead of the single WalshCode that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation.Evidence of Smearing is usually identified by WalshChannels not at correct levels or being present when notselected in the Code Domain Power Test.NOTEB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-3PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 10001 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 06232 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F796 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD77 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 71509 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB511 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 471812 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 529213 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B114 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 628615 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 561218 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E221 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 397924 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F125 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E1326 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC527 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC828 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 041729 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 662830 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 578231 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 530732 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E333 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF034 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 007335 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 063736 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E0738 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 053439 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 100341 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 018242 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA145 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC446 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 470849 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E953 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D154 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C0955 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 227557 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 512558 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 133859 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB861 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B6563 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C2464 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 675365 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF067 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 661368 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E6169 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E2570 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 311074 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE177 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F1778 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F4480 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 061381 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 340482 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 796183 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 244986 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 121087 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D388 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D589 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B191 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B994 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF795 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D696 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C398 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-5PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-7PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-9PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-11PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP B-13PRELIMINARYTable B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6 B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesB
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix C: FRU Optimization / ATP Test Matrix Appendix ContentFRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background C-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesC
FRU Optimization/ATP Test MatrixFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP C-1PRELIMINARYUsage and BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also mandate Re–Optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.Re–Optimization Actions listed for any assembly detailedin the tables below must be performed anytime an RFCable associated with it is replaced.NOTEDetailed Optimization/ATP TestMatrixTable C-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS Components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumes that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMFuntil Full Redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table:Not every procedure required to bring the site back inservice is indicated in Table C-1. It is meant to be used asa guideline ONLY.The table assumes that the user is familiar enough withthe BTS Optimization/Acceptance Test Procedure tounderstand which Test Equipment Set–ups, Calibrations,and BTS Site preparation will be required beforeperforming the table number procedures referenced.NOTEPassive BTS components (such as the Bandpass Filters and 2:1Combiners) only require a TX Calibration Audit to be performed in lieuof a Full Path Calibration.SIf the TX Path Calibration Audit fails, the entire RF Path Calibrationwill need to be repeated.SIf the RF Path Calibration fails, further troubleshooting is warranted.If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX Signal FlowPaths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TXCalibration Audit Command.NOTEWhen the CIO is replaced, the SCCP Cage remains powered up. TheBBX Cards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their originalslots, and re–downloaded (Code and BLO Data). RX and TX CalibrationAudits should then be performed on the affected Carrier Sectors.C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued C-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTable#DescriptionDRF or TRFRX CablesTX CablesMPC / EMPC CIO SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)BBX2/BBX–1XMCC24E/MCC8E/MCC–1XCSM/GPS HSO/HSOX50–pair Punchblock (with RGPS)RGD/20–pair Punchblock with RGDCCD CardGLI2ETIB or Associated CablesLPAC CableLPA or LPA Trunking ModuleLPA Bandpass Filter or CombinerSwitch Card RFDS CablesRFDSTable 3-17/Table 3-18/Download Code/Data D D D D D DTable 3-20 Enable CSM Cards D D D D 9Table 3-24 GPS & HSO Initialization/ Verification D DDDDD9Table 3-41 TX Path Calibration 4 4 1 1 4 * 33 4 7Table 3-42 Download Offsets to BBX 4 1 4 *Table 3-43 TX Path Audit 4 4 1 1 4 * 3 4 7Table 3-51 RFDS Path Calibrationand Offset Data Download 6 5 41 1 6 * 3 46 6Table 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask 4 1 4 * * * *Table 4-6 Waveform Quality (Rho) 4 * 1 4 * **10 * *Table 4-7 Pilot Time Offset 4 * 1 4 * ** * *Table 4-8 Code Domain Power /Noise Floor 4 1 4 8 8 8* * *Table 4-9 FER Test 55 522588 8* 7Table 3-53throughTable 3-55Alarm Tests Dtable continued next pageC
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP C-3PRELIMINARYTable C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTable#RFDSRFDS CablesSwitch Card LPA Bandpass Filter or CombinerLPA or LPA Trunking ModuleLPAC CableETIB or Associated CablesGLI2CCD CardRGD/20–pair Punchblock with RGD50–pair Punchblock (with RGPS)HSO/HSOXCSM/GPS MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC–1XBBX2/BBX–1XSCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)CIO MPC / EMPC TX CablesRX CablesDRF or TRFDescriptionOPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:D Required* Perform if determined necessary for additional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for site certification.1. Perform on all carrier & sector TX Paths to the SCCP Cage.2. Perform on all carrier & sector main and Diversity RX Paths to the SCCP Cage.3. Perform on all primary & redundant TX Paths of affected carrier. (LPAC replacement affects all carriers.)4. Perform on affected carrier & sector TX Path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier & sector TX Paths).5. Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX Path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier RX Paths).6. Perform on all RF Paths of the affected carrier & sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers).7. Perform with Redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier.8. Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.9. Perform only if RGD/RGPS or HSO expansion was installed.10. Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier. C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued C-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesC
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Appendix ContentBBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage &andBackground D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS OutputFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP D-1PRELIMINARYUsage and BackgroundTable D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all Code DomainChannel Element Gain Settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RFOutput (as measured in dBm at the BTS Antenna Connector) is shown inthe table. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO)Values have been calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed–up to produce a CDMACarrier with only the Pilot Channel (no MCC Cards Forward Linkenabled). Pilot Gain is set to 262.In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate exactly to theactual RF Output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm Output Range. This isthe level used to calibrate the BTS.Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm’Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 – – – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 – – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 – – – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39517 – – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 – – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 – – – – – – – 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8table continued next pageD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output – continued D-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm’Gainb333435363738394041424344397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 – – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2 D
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information Appendix ContentCDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information E-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction E-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels E-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels E-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming InformationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP E-1PRELIMINARYIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX Synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLI2s via the Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) Bus. Thisprogramming data determines the Transmit and Receive TransceiverOperating Frequencies (Channels) for each BBX.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum. There are 10 CDMA Wireline orNon–wireline Band Channels used in a CDMA System (unique perCustomer Operating System). FREQ (MHz)RX TX2751175CHANNEL1863.759251851.25251871.25425675 1883.751896.251908.751943.751931.251951.251963.751976.251988.75ADBEFCFW00463Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCalculating 1900 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA Candidate OperatingChannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingTransmit and Receive Frequencies. Center Frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX – 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on the Customer CDMA SystemFrequency Plan.Each CDMA Channel requires a 1.77 MHz Frequency Segment. Theactual CDMA Carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz Guard Bandon both sides of the carrier.Minimum Frequency Separation required between any CDMA Carrierand the nearest NAMPS/AMPS Carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50table continued next pageE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP E-3PRELIMINARYTable E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50575 023F 1958.75 1878.75600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARY800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American CellularTelephone Frequency Spectrum. There are 10 CDMA Wireline orNon–Wireline Band Channels used in a CDMA System (unique perCustomer Operating System).RX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)Calculating 800 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA Candidate OperatingChannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingTransmit and Receive Frequencies. Center Frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1–777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013–1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX – 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHzE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP E-5PRELIMINARYTable E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.750050 0032 871.5000 826.500075 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500table continued next pageE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel Numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 E
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix F: Test Equipment Preparation Appendix ContentTest Equipment Preparation F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent R7495A Test Equipment Set–up F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address F-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address F-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address F-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address F-10 Hewlett Packard HP 8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-12 . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address F-14 . . . . . . . . . Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address F-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address F-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address F-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter F-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control Settings F-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8921A with PCS Interface Test Equipment Connections F-19 . . . . . . . . HP 8921A with PCS Interface System Connectivity Test F-22 . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Set–up for HP 8921A F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935 F-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection F-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Set–up for Advantest R3465 F-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8932/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-28 . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment Interconnection F-29 . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Calibration F-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Without the LMF F-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self–alignment (Calibration) F-30 . . . . Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the Test Cable Set–up using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-35 Calibrating the Test Cable Set–up with the Advantest R3465 F-40 . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesF
Test Equipment PreparationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-1PRELIMINARYPurposeThis appendix provides information on pre–testing set–up for thefollowing Test Equipment Items (not required for the Cybertest TestSet):SAgilent E7495A Test Equipment Set–upSAgilent E4406A Transmitter Test SetSAgilent E4432B Signal GeneratorSAdvantest R3267 Spectrum AnalyzerSAdvantest R3562 Signal GeneratorSAgilent 8935 Analyzer (formerly HP 8935)SHP 8921 with PCS Interface AnalyzerSAdvantest R3465 AnalyzerSMotorola CyberTestSHP 437 Power MeterSGigatronics 8541C Power MeterSGPIB AdapterPre–testing set–up information covered includes verification and settingGPIB Addresses, Inter–unit Cabling, Connectivity Testing, Pre–testControl Settings, and Equipment Calibration for items that are notcalibrated with the Calibrate Test Equipment Function of the LMF.The following procedures cover verification and changing GPIBAddresses for the various items of CDMA Test Equipment supported bythe LMF.Agilent R7495A Test EquipmentSet–upThis Test Equipment requires a warm-up period of at least 30 minutesbefore BTS Testing or Calibration begins.Using the Agilent E7495A with the LMFThe Agilent E7495A does not require the use of the 19MHz FrequencyReference; if connected, it will be ignored. The Even Sec SYNCConnection is required.The Agilent E7495A Signal Generator is only calibrated down to –80db.In order to achieve accurate FER Testing, ensure that the RX Set–upincludes at least 40db of Attenuation. This will ensure the SignalGenerator will output sufficient power to operate in the calibrated range.Set the IP Address as described in Table F-1.Table F-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A Test SetnStep Action1Use the System Button > Controls >IPAdmin to set an IP Address on the E7495A as128.0.0.49, and Netmask to 255.255.255.128. F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued F-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYConnectionsIt is recommended that you use a hub with BNC and RJ–45Connections. Suggested Models: Netgear Model EN104 (4 Port) orEN108 (8 Port).Do NOT use Model Numbers ending with “TP”; thosehave no BNC Connectors.IMPORTANT*The LMF connects to the hub, which in turn, connects to the BTS and tothe Agilent E7495A.Agilent E7495A to Hub – This is an Ethernet Cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45.LMF to Hub – Use one of the following cables to connect the LMF tothe Hub:– Ethernet Cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45 – Make sure that the LAN Card isset for either AUTO or to use RJ–45 only.– COAX Cable between LAN Card and Hub – Use a “T” on the huband connect a cable between the other end of the “T” and the BTSLAN Connection.Hub to BTS – Use BNC “T” Connector on the hub. If your hub doesn’thave BNC Ports, use a BNC to UTP Adapter.Detecting Test EquipmentCheck that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. Agilentequipment must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Then perform theprocedures described in Table F-2.Table F-2: Agilent E7495A Test Equipment Detection ProcedurenStep Action1Click the Tools Menu.2 Choose Options.3 Check Agilent E7495A Option in non–GPIB Test Equipment and enter its IP Address.4 Click Apply and wait a moment.5 Click Dismiss. F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-3PRELIMINARYPower Sensor CalibrationTable F-3 describes the E7495A Power Sensor Calibration.Table F-3: E7495A Power Sensor Calibration ProcedurenStep Action1Display the Power Meter Screen.2Zero the Power Meter by performing the following actions.– Make sure you are connected as shown in Figure F-1.2a Press the Zero Softkey.2b Press the Continue Softkey.3Calibrate the Power Meter by performing the following actions.3a Press Ref CF.3b Enter the Reference Cal Factor, reading it off the label on the Power Sensor Head.3c Press Calibrate.3d Connect the Power Sensor.– Refer to Figure F-2.3e Press Continue.3f Press Cal Factor.3g Enter the Cal Factor from the label on the Power Sensor Head.– Select a Cal Factor that is within the operating frequency of the Base Station. Use onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InPOWER SENSORNOT CONNECTEDFigure F-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration ConnectionF
Test Equipment Preparation – continued F-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InPOWER SENSORCONNECTEDFigure F-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration ConnectionCable CalibrationFollow the directions in the WinLMF Program to calibrate cables.– Calibrate the Short Test Cable (refer to Figure 3-15 on Page 3-66)and two 10 dB Pads to get a Base Line and then calibrate the TXand RX set–up. Since you need at least 40 dB of Loss when doingthe FER Test, the set–up for RX is the same as TX.ATP Set–upTX Path Calibration Set–up is shown in Test Equipment Set–up. Referto Figure 3-18 on Page 3-69.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB AddressesFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-5PRELIMINARYAgilent E4406A TransmitterTester GPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-3 and perform the procedure in Table F-4 to verifyand, if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB Address.System KeyBk SpKeyEnterKeyData Entry KeypadSoftkey ButtonsSoftkey Label Display AreaActive Function Areati-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftwFigure F-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressTable F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address ProcedurenStep Action1In the SYSTEM section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the System Key.– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.2Press the Config I/O Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.– The Softkey Labels changes.– The current instrument GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.3If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.3a Press the GPIB Address Softkey Button.– In the on–screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by thecurrent GPIB Address.table continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address ProcedurenActionStep3b On the Front Panel Data Entry Keypad, enter the Analyzer GPIB Address of 18.– The GPIB Address Label changes to Enter.– Characters typed wi the Keypad replaces the current GPIB Address in the Active Function Area.NOTETo correct an entry, press the Bk Sp Key to delete one character at a time.3c Press the Enter Softkey Button or the Keypad Enter Key to set the new GPIB Address.– The Config I/O Softkey Labels will re–appear.– The new GPIB Address will be displayed under the GPIB Address Softkey Label. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-7PRELIMINARYAgilent E4432B SignalGenerator GPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-4 and perform the procedure in Table F-5 to verifyand, if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB Address.Numeric KeypadSoftkey ButtonsSoftkey Label Display AreaActive Entry AreaBackspace KeyUtility KeyFigure F-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressTable F-5: Verify that and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressnStep Action1In the MENUS section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the Utility Key.– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.2Press the GPIB/RS232 Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.– The Softkey Labels changes.– The current instrument GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.3If the current GPIB Address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:3a Press the GPIB Address Softkey Button.– The GPIB Address Label and current GPIB Address changes to boldface.– In the on–screen Active Entry Area, Address: is displayed followed by the current GPIB Address.3b On the Front Panel Numeric Keypad, enter the Signal Generator GPIB Address of 1.– The GPIB Address Label changes to Enter.– Characters typed in the Keypad replace the current GPIB Address in the Active Entry Display.NOTETo correct an entry, press the Backspace Key at the lower right of the Keypad to delete one character ata time.3c Press the Enter Softkey Button to set the new GPIB Address.– The new GPIB Address will be displayed under the GPIB Address Softkey Label. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3267 SpectrumAnalyzer GPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-5 and perform the procedure in Table F-6 to verifyand, if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIBAddress.onREMOTE LEDLCL KeyCONFIG KeySoftkey Label Display Area Softkey ButtonsKeypad BS Key ENTR KeyFigure F-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressTable F-6: Verify that and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressnStep Action1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL Key.– The LED extinguishes.2Press the CONFIG Key.–CONFIG Softkey Labels will appear in the Softkey Label display area of the instrumentdisplay.– The current GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.3If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a Press the GPIB Address Softkey.–A GPIB Address Entry window will open in the instrument display showing the currentGPIB Address.table continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-9PRELIMINARYTable F-6: Verify that and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressnActionStep3b Enter 18 on the Keypad in the ENTRY Section of the Instrument Front Panel.– Characters typed on the Keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB AddressEntry Window.NOTETo correct an entry, press the BS (Backspace) Key at the lower right of the Keypad to delete onecharacter at a time.3c Press the ENTR Key to the lower right of the Keypad to set the new GPIB Address.– The GPIB Address Entry window closes.– The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address Softkey Label. Advantest R3562 SignalGenerator GPIB AddressSet the GP–IP ADDRESS Switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562Signal Generator to Address 1 as shown in Figure F-6.123 4567854321GP–IP ADDRESS10GPIB Address set to “1”Figure F-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch SettingF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAgilent 8935 Series E6380(formerly HP 8935) Test SetGPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-7 and perform the procedure in Table F-7 to verifyand, if necessary, change the Agilent 8935 GPIB Address.PresetCursor ControlShiftInst ConfigLocalFW00885Figure F-7: Agilent 8935 Test SetThis procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEThe HP I/O Configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or no device on the GPIB will beaccessible.– Consult Test Equipment OEM Documentation for additional information as required.1To verify that the GPIB Addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the Agilent 8935.– The current HP–IB Address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it:2a Press Shift and Inst Config.2b Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to the HP–IB Adrs Field.table continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-11PRELIMINARYTable F-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address ProcedurenActionStep2c Press the Cursor Control Knob to select the field.2d Turn the Cursor Control Knob as required to change the address to 18.2e Press the Cursor Control Knob to set the address.3 Press Preset to return to normal operation. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYHewlett Packard HP 8921A andHP83236A/B GPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-8 and perform the procedure in Table F-8 to verifyand, if necessary, change the HP 8921A HP 83236A GPIB Addresses.PresetCursor ControlShiftLocalFigure F-8: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/BThis procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses ProcedurenStep Action1To verify that the GPIB Addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP 8921A.– The current HP–IB Address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current HP–IB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.2a Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.2b Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select thefield.table continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-13PRELIMINARYTable F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses ProcedurenActionStep2c Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.2d Turn the Cursor Control Knob to change the HP–IB Address to 18 and press the knob to set theaddress.2e Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.3To set the HP 83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB Address = 19, set the DIP Switches as follows:– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1 F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465Communications Test Set GPIBAddressRefer to Figure F-9 and perform the procedure in Table F-9 to verifyand, if necessary, change the GPIB Address for the Advantest R3465.BNC“T”REF UNLOCK EVENSEC/SYNC IN CDMATIME BASE INPOWEROFF ONREF FW00337LCL Shift PresetGPIB and othersVernierKnobFigure F-9: R3465 Communications Test SetThis procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address ProcedurenStep Action1To verify that the GPIB Address is set correctly, perform the following:1a Press SHIFT then PRESET.1b Press LCL.1c Press the GPIB and Others CRT Menu Key to view the current address.2If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.2a Turn the Vernier Knob as required to select 18.2b Press the Vernier Knob to set the address.3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-15PRELIMINARYMotorola CyberTest GPIBAddressPerform the procedure in Table F-10 to verify and, if necessary, changethe GPIB Address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIBAddress requires the following items:SMotorola CyberTest Communications Analyzer.SComputer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95 (or later).SMotorola CyberTAME Software Program named “TAME”.SParallel Printer Port Cable (shipped with the CyberTest unit).This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address ProcedurenStep Action1On the LMF Desktop, locate the CyberTAME Icon.2Double–click on the CyberTAME Icon to run the CyberTAME Application.3In the CyberTAME Window Taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.– The CyberTAME Software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB Address.– It then will open the IEEE 488.2 Dialog Box.4If the current GPIB Address is not 18, perform the following actions to change it.4a Set the GPIB Address to 18.– Use the UP and DOWN Increment Arrows. or– Double–click in the field and type the number.4b Click on the OK Button.– The new address will be written to the CyberTest through the Parallel Port and saved.5Verify that the address has been set by repeating Steps 3 and 4.– The new address should now appear in the IEEE 488.2 Dialog Box Address Field.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-16 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYHP 437 Power Meter GPIBAddressRefer to Figure F-10 and follow the steps in Table F-11 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the HP 437 GPIB Address.EnterPresetSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308REFFigure F-10: HP 437 Power MeterThis procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-11: Verify and/or Change the HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address ProcedurenStep Action 1 Press Shift and PRESET. 2 Use the y (UP) Arrow Key to navigate to the HP–IB ADRS and press ENTER.– The HP–IB Address is displayed.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB. 3 If the current GPIB Address is not set to 13, perform the following actions to change it.3a Use the y (UP) and b (DOWN) Arrow Keys to change the HP–IB ADRS to 13.3b Press ENTER to set the new address.4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-17PRELIMINARYGigatronics 8541C PowerMeter GPIB AddressRefer to Figure F-11 and follow the steps in Table F-12 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address.MENU ENTER ARROWKEYS1REF FW00564Figure F-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailThis procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressnStep Action1! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable with AC Power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or miscalibration.Press MENU.2Use the b Arrow Key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.3Use the b Arrow Key to select GPIB and press ENTER.The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:Use the a ’ Arrow Keys as required to select MODE.Use the by Arrow Keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.5If the GPIB Address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:Use the ’ Arrow Key to select ADDRESS.Use the by Arrow Keys as required to set the GPIB Address to 13.6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-18 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRS232 GPIB Interface AdapterEnsure that the RS–232 GPIB Interface adapter DIP Switches are set asshown in Figure F-12.RS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSG MODEFigure F-12: RS232 GPIB Interface AdapterF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and ControlFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-19PRELIMINARYInter–Unit Connection, Testing,and Control SettingsThe following illustrations, tables, and procedures provide theinformation necessary to prepare various items of CDMA TestEquipment supported by the LMF for BTS Calibration and/orAcceptance Testing.HP 8921A with PCS InterfaceTest Equipment ConnectionsThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A TestEquipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All Test Equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB Bus.The LMF expects each piece of Test Equipment to have a factory-setGPIB Address (refer to Table F-8 and Figure F-8). If there is acommunications problem between the LMF and any piece of TestEquipment, verify that the GPIB Addresses have been set correctly andthat the GPIB Cables are firmly connected to the Test Equipment.Figure F-13 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium Reference.Table F-13: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections without Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:Connector Type8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCSConnector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–Female – SMC–Female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin Custom BUS10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC–Male – BNC–MaleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB Cable10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–Male – BNC–MaleF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continued F-20 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETREF INHP 83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP 8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP 83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBTO GPIBINTERFACEBOXTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORFW00368Figure F-13: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium ReferenceTable F-14: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections with Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:Connector Type8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCSConnector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–Female – SMC–Female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–Female – SMC–FemaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–Male – BNC–MaleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB Cable10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC–Male – BNC–MaleF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-21PRELIMINARYFigure F-14 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium Reference.REF INREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACEBOX10 MHZ WITHRUBIDIUM STANDARDHP 83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP 8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP 83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBFW00369Figure F-14: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium ReferenceF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continued F-22 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYHP 8921A with PCS InterfaceSystem Connectivity TestPerform the procedure in Table F-15 to verify that the connectionsbetween the PCS Interface and the HP 8921A are correct and cables areintact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of eachinstrument.Disconnect other GPIB Devices, especially systemcontrollers, from the system before running theconnectivity software.NOTETable F-15: System Connectivity Test ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure only after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert the HP 83236A Manual Control/System Card into the Memory Card Slot.2Press the [PRESET] Pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] Pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu Screen.4Position the cursor on Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the Cursor ControlKnob.5In the Choices Selection Box, select Card.6Position the cursor on Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the Cursor ControlKnob.7In the Choices Selection Box, select SYS_CONN.8Position the cursor on RUN TEST and select it.– The software will provide operator prompts through completion of the Connectivity Set–up.9Perform the following action when the test is complete.– Position cursor on STOP TEST and select it.OR– Press the [K5] Pushbutton.10 To return to the Main Menu, press the [K5] Pushbutton.11 Press the [PRESET] Pushbutton. F
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-23PRELIMINARYPretest Set–up for HP 8921ABefore the HP 8921A CDMA Analyzer is used for LMF–controlledtesting, it must be set–up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-16: Pretest Set–up for HP 8921AnStep Action1Unplug the Memory Card if it is plugged in.2Press the CURSOR CONTROL Knob.3Position the cursor on IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn. Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935Before the Agilent 8935 Analyzer is used for LMF–controlled testing, itmust be set–up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-17: Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935nStep Action1Unplug the Memory Card if it is plugged in.2Press the Shift Button and then press the I/O Config Button.3Press the Push to Select Knob.4Position the cursor on IO CONFIG and select it.5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.F
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continued F-24 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465 ConnectionThe following diagram depicts the Rear Panel of the Advantest R3465Test Equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All TestEquipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB Bus. TheLMF expects each piece of Test Equipment to have a factory-set GPIBAddress. Refer to Table F-9 and Figure F-9.If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece ofTest Equipment, verify that the GPIB Addresses have been set correctlyand that the GPIB Cables are firmly connected to the Test Equipment.Figure F-15 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium Reference.ADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELGPIBCONNECTORSERIAL I/OLOCAL INSERIAL I/OSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3561LREAR PANELR3465REAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)XYZIF OUT421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00370Figure F-15: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-25PRELIMINARYFigure F-16 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium Reference.SERIAL I/OGPIBCONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELFROM 10 MHZRUBIDIUM REFERENCELOCAL INSERIAL I/OIF OUTSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3465/3463REAR PANELR3561LREAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)XYZ421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00371Figure F-16: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continued F-26 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYR3465 GPIB Clock Set–upTable F-18 describes the steps to set the clock for the Advantest R3465Equipment.Table F-18: Advantest R3465 Clock Set–up ProcedurenStep Action1Observe the current date and time displayed in upper right of the CRT Display.2If the date and time are incorrect, perform the following to change them:2a Push the Date/Time CRT Menu Key.2b Rotate the Vernier Knob to select and set.2c Push the Vernier Knob to enter.2d Press the SHIFT Button, then press the PRESET Button (just below the CRT Display). Pretest Set–up for AdvantestR3465Before the Advantest R3465 Analyzer is used for LMF–controlledtesting, it must be set–up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-19: Pretest Set–up for Advantest R346nStep Action1Press the SHIFT Button so the LED next to it is illuminated.2Press the RESET Button.F
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-27PRELIMINARYAgilent 8932/E4432B TestEquipment InterconnectionTo perform FER Testing on a 1X BTS with the Agilent 8935, a1X–capable Signal Generator, such as the Agilent E4432B, must be usedin conjunction with the CDMA Base Station Test Set. For properoperation, the Test Equipment Items must be interconnected as follows.10 MHz Reference Signal Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from the 8935 10 MHz REFOUT Connector to the E4432B 10MHz IN Connector as shown inFigure F-17.Even Second Pulse Reference Refer to Figure F-17, and connect a BNC “T” Connector to the 8935EVEN SEC SYNC IN Connector. – Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from one side of the BNC“T” to the E4432B PATTERN TRIG IN Connector. – Connect the other side of the BNC “T” to the CSM Card SYNCMONITOR Connector using a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable..E4432B10 MHz INTO GPIBE4432BPATTERN TRIG INTO CSM BOARDSYNCH MONITOR(EVEN SEC TICK)893510 MHzREF OUT8935EVEN SECONDSYNC INWITH BNC “T” TDME0011–1Figure F-17: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second Clock ConnectionsF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continued F-28 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAgilent E4406A/E4432B TestEquipment InterconnectionTo provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,the 10 MHz Reference Signal from the E4406A Transmitter Test Setmust be provided to the E4432B Signal Generator.– Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from the E4406A 10 MHzOUT (SWITCHED) Connector to the E4432B 10MHz INConnector as shown in Figure F-18.E4406A10 MHz OUT(SWITCHED)E4432B10 MHz INTO GPIB BOXTDME0009–1Figure F-18: Agilent 10 MHz Reference ConnectionsF
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-29PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3267/R3562 TestEquipment InterconnectionTo provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,the R3257 Spectrum Analyzer must be interconnected with the R3562Signal Generator as follows:10 MHz Reference Signal Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable between the R3562 SYNTHEREF IN Connector and the R3267 10 MHz OUT Connector as shownin Figure F-19..Serial I/O Using the AdvanTest Cable provided, connect the R3267 SERIAL I/OConnector to the R3562 SERIAL I/O Connector as shown inFigure F-19..TDME0010–1R3562SYNTHE REF IN TO GPIBBOX R3562SERIAL I/OTO GPIB BOXR326710 MHZ OUT R3267SERIAL I/OFigure F-19: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O ConnectionsF
Equipment Calibration F-30 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCalibration Without the LMFSeveral Test Equipment Items used in the Optimization Process requirePre–Calibration actions or Calibration Verification that are not supportedby the LMF. Procedures to perform these activities for the applicableTest Equipment Items are covered in this section.Agilent E4406A TransmitterTester Self–alignment(Calibration)System KeySoftkey ButtonsSoftkey Label Display AreaFigure F-20: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration)Refer to Figure F-20 and perform the procedure in Table F-20 to performthe Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration).Table F-20: Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) ProcedurenStep Action1In the SYSTEM section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the System Key.– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.2Press the Alignments Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.– The Softkey Labels changes.3Press the Align All Now Softkey Button.– All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.– The display changes to show progress and results of the alignments performed.– The alignment will take less than one minute. F
Equipment Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-31PRELIMINARYCalibrating HP 437 PowerMeterPrecise Transmit Output Power Calibration Measurements are madeusing a Bolometer–type Broadband Power Meter with a sensitive PowerSensor. Perform the procedure in Table F-21 to enter information uniqueto the Power Sensor before calibrating the Test Set–up. Refer toFigure F-21 as required.This procedure must be done before the AutomatedCalibration to enter Power Sensor–specific CalibrationValues.NOTECONNECT POWERSENSOR WITH POWERMETER TURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSORTO POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.POWER REFERENCE ISENABLED USING THE SHIFT ’KEYSSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308Figure F-21: Power Meter DetailTable F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration ProcedurenStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable with AC Power applied to the meter.– Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or mis–calibration.1Make sure the Power Meter AC LINE Pushbutton is OFF.2Connect the Power Sensor Cable to the SENSOR Input.3Set the AC LINE Pushbutton to ON.* IMPORTANTThe Calibration should be performed only after the Power Meter and Sensor have been allowed towarm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.table continued on next pageF
Equipment Calibration – continued F-32 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration ProcedurenActionStep4Perform the following actions to set or verify that the correct Power Sensor Model:4a Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.4b Identify the Power Sensor Model Number from the Sensor Label.4c Use the [y] or [b] Button to select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].5Ensure that the Power Reference Output is OFF.– Refer to the illustration for Step 9.6Observe the instrument display to determine if the triangular indicator over PWR REF isdisplayed.SIf the triangular indicator is not displayed, proceed to Step 7.SIf the triangular indicator is displayed:–Proceed to Step 8.– Press [SHIFT] then [’] to turn it off.7 Press [ZERO].– The display will show “Zeroing ******.”– Wait for the process to complete.8Connect the Power Sensor to the POWER REF Output.9Turn on the PWR REF by performing the following actions.9a Press [SHIFT] then [’].9b Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above PWR REF.10 Perform the following actions to set the REF CF%.10a Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.10b Enter the Sensor’s REF CF% from the Sensor’s Decal using the Arrow Keys and press [ENTER].– The Power Meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.NOTEIf the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the Power Sensor, assume it to be 100%.table continued on next pageF
Equipment Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-33PRELIMINARYTable F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration ProcedurenActionStep11 Perform the following actions to set the CAL FAC %:11a Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.11b On the Sensor’s Decal, locate an approximate Calibration Percentage Factor (CF%) at 2 GHz.11c Enter the Sensor’s Calibration % (CF%) using the Arrow Keys and press [ENTER].– When complete, the Power Meter will typically display 0.05 dBm; any reading between 0.00and 0.10 is normal.12 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following actions.12a Press [SHIFT] then [’].12b Disconnect the Power Sensor from the POWER REF Output. F
Equipment Calibration – continued F-34 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCalibrating the Gigatronics8541C Power MeterPrecise transmit Output Power Calibration measurements are made usinga Bolometer–type Broadband Power Meter with a sensitive PowerSensor. Perform the procedure in Table F-22 to enter information uniqueto the Power Sensor.Table F-22: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Calibration ProcedurenStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable while AC Power is applied to the meter.– Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or miscalibration.1Make sure the Power Meter POWER Pushbutton is OFF.3Connect the Power Sensor Cable to the SENSOR Input.4Set the POWER Pushbutton to ON.NOTEAllow the Power Meter and sensor to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes beforeperforming the Calibration Procedure.5Connect the Power Sensor to the CALIBRATOR Output Connector.6 Press ZERO.– Wait for the process to complete.– Sensor Factory Calibration Data is read to Power Meter during this process.7When the Zeroing Process is complete, disconnect the Power Sensor from the CALIBRATOROutput. CONNECT POWER SENSORWITH POWER METERTURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSOR TOCALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNITFRONT View REAR ViewGPIB CONNECTIONAC POWERFW00564Figure F-22: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailF
Manual Cable CalibrationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-35PRELIMINARYCalibrating the Test CableSet–up using HP PCS Interface(HP83236)Table F-23 covers the procedure to calibrate the Test Equipment usingthe HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with theHP83236 PCS Interface.This calibration method must be executed with great care.Some Losses are measured close to the minimum limit ofthe Power Meter Sensor (–30dBm).NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest Equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly forCable Calibration.STest Equipment has been selected and calibrated.Table F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEVerify that GPIB Controller is turned off.1Insert the HP83236 Manual Control System Card into the Memory Card Slot.2Press the Preset Pushbutton.3Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS Pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) Screen.2Position the cursor on Select Procedure Location and select it.3In the Choices Selection Box, select CARD.4Position the cursor on Select Procedure Filename and select it.5In the Choices Selection Box, select MANUAL.6Position the cursor on RUN TEST and select it.– The HP Analyzer must be in Control Mode.7 Select YES.8Proceed based upon the analyzer being used.SIf the HP83236A is being used, proceed to Step 9.SIf the HP83236B is being used, proceed to Step 10.table continued on next pageF
Manual Cable Calibration – continued F-36 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration ProcedurenActionStep9Set the Channel Number=<chan#> by performing the following actions.9a Position the cursor on Channel Number and select it.9b Enter the chan# using the Numeric Keypad.9c Press [Enter].– The screen will go blank.– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the Channel Number Line.9d Proceed to Step 11.10 Set the Channel Frequency by performing the following actions.10a Position the cursor on Frequency Band and press Enter.10b Select User Defined Frequency.10c Go Back to Previous Menu.10d Position the cursor to 83236 Generator Frequency and enter actual RX Frequency.10e Position the cursor to 83236 Analyzer Frequency and enter actual TX Frequency.11 Set the RF Generator Level by performing the following actions.11a Position the cursor on RF Generator Level and select it.11b Enter –10 using the Numeric Keypad.11c Press [Enter].– The screen will go blank.– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator LevelLine.12 Set the user–fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm by performing the following actions.12a Position the cursor on Analyzer Attenuation and select it12b Position the cursor on User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.12c Enter 0 (zero) using the Numeric Keypad and press [Enter].13 Select Back to Previous Menu.14 Record the Generator Frequency Level .SIf using the HP83226A, proceed to Step 15.SIf using the HP83226B, proceed to Step 16.table continued on next pageF
Manual Cable Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-37PRELIMINARYTable F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration ProcedurenActionStep15 HP83226A: Perform the following actions.15a Position the cursor on Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.15b Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.15c Position the cursor on Prev Menu and select it.15d Proceed to Step 17.16 HP83226B: Perform the following actions.16a Position the cursor on Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.16b Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 –1910 MHz).16c Position the cursor on Prev Menu and select it.17 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.18 Connect the Power Sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY Port of the PCS Interface.19 On the HP 8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.20 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude Value.21 Increase the Amplitude Value until the Power Meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.NOTEThe Amplitude Value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune theAmplitude by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.22 Disconnect the Power Sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.NOTEThe Power Meter Sensor’s lower limit is –30dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dBshould be measured using this method.For further accuracy, always re-zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor tothe component being calibrated.–After connecting the Power Sensor to the component, record the calibrated Lossimmediately.23 Disconnect all components in the Test Set–up in order to calibrate each component separately.23a Connect each component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the Power Sensor.23b Record the calibrated Loss Value displayed on the Power Meter.SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB(B) 20dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB24 After all components have been calibrated, re–assemble all of the components back together.table continued on next pageF
Manual Cable Calibration – continued F-38 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration ProcedurenActionStep25 Calculate the Total Test Set–up Loss Value by adding up all the individual Loss Values:SExample: Total Test Set–up Loss Value = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.– This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.26 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS Button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) Screen.27 Select Continue (K2).28 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.29 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.30 Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) Address (HP 8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMAInterface).– Fields not specifically identified remain at default values.30a Under To Screen, select More.30b Select IO CONFIG.30c Set HP–IB Adrs to 18.30d Set Mode to Talk&Lstn.31 Verify that the HP 8921A is displaying Frequency instead of RF Channel.31a Press the blue [SHIFT] Button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] Button; this switches tothe CONFIG (CONFIGURE) Screen.31b Use the Cursor Control to set RF Display to Freq.32 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the Test Cable Insertion Loss Values into the LMF. F
Manual Cable Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-39PRELIMINARY(A)(C)(A)POWERSENSOR(C)30 dBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER150 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSOR(B)POWERSENSOR(B)MEMORYCARDSLOT20dB / 20 WATTATTENUATORFW0029250 ΩTERMINATORPOWERSENSORFigure F-23: Cable Calibration using HP8921 with PCS InterfaceF
Manual Cable Calibration – continued F-40 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCalibrating the Test CableSet–up with the AdvantestR3465Ensure that the GPIB Interface is OFF for the duration ofthis procedure.IMPORTANT*Advantest R3465 Manual Test Set–up and Calibration must beperformed on both the TX and RX Frequencies.Table F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration ProcedurenStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure can only be performed after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located below the display.2Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT area of the Control Panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT Menu Key.4Select the Set–up CRT Menu Key.5Use the Vernier Knob and the Cursor Keys to set the following parameters.Generator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFFNOTEFields not listed remain at default values.6Select the Return CRT Menu Key.7 Press FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area.8Set the Frequency to the desired value by using the Keypad Entry Keys.9Verify that the Mod CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.SIf it is highlighting OFF, proceed to Step 10.SIf it is not highlighting OFF:– Press the Mod Key to toggle it OFF.–Proceed to Step 10.table continued on next pageF
Manual Cable Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP F-41PRELIMINARYTable F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration ProcedurenActionStep10 Verify that the Output CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.SIf it is highlighting OFF, proceed to Step 11.SIf it is not highlighting OFF:– Press the Output Key to toggle it OFF.–Proceed to Step 11.11 Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.13 Zero the Power Meter.14 Connect the Power Sensor directly to the “RF OUT” Port on the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit.15 Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle Output to ON.16 Record the Power Meter Reading ________________________17 Disconnect the Power Meter Sensor from the R3561L RF OUT Jack.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter Sensor’s lower limit is –30dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method.For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor tothe component being calibrated.–Then, after connecting the Power Sensor to the component, record the calibrated Lossimmediately.18 Disconnect all components in the the Test Set–up in order to calibrate each one separately.18a Connect each component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” Port and the Power Sensor.– Refer to Figure F-24, “Set–ups A, B, and C”.18b Record the calibrated Loss Value displayed on the Power Meter for each connection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB(C) 20dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB19 Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle Output OFF.20 Calculate the total Test Set–up loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total Test Set–up loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.21 Press the FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area.22 Using the Keypad Entry Keys, set the test frequency to the RX Frequency.table continued on next pageF
Manual Cable Calibration – continued F-42 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration ProcedurenActionStep23 Repeat Steps 9 through 19 for the RX Frequency.24 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the Test Cable Insertion Loss Values into the LMF. POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW0032050 ΩTERMINATORFigure F-24: Cable Calibration using the Advantest R3465F
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix G: Downloading ROM Code Appendix ContentDownloading ROM Code G-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure – Downloading ROM Code G-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesG
Downloading ROM CodeFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP G-1PRELIMINARYException Procedure –Downloading ROM CodeThis procedure is not part of a normal Optimization.Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternativeexists to load a BTS Device with the correct version of ROM Code.One GLI must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green) beforeROM Code can be downloaded to non–GLI Devices.NOTEThe correct ROM and RAM Codes for the SoftwareRelease used on the BSS must be loaded into BTSDevices. To identify the correct device ROM and RAMCode Loads for the Software Release being used on theBSS, refer to the Version Matrix section of the SCtCDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes orCD–ROMs containing the BSS Software).All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM andRAM Code specified for the Software Release used on theBSS before any Optimization or Acceptance TestProcedures can be performed.If a replacement device is loaded with ROM Code that isnot compatible with the BSS Software Release being used,the Device ROM Code can be changed using the LMFbefore performing the BTS Optimization and ATPs. Adevice loaded with later release ROM Code can not beconverted back to a previous release ROM Code in thefield without Motorola assistance.CAUTIONIf it is necessary to download ROM Code to a device from the LMF, theprocedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM Codedownload using the LMF.PrerequisitesPrior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAMCode Files exist in the LMF Computer’s applicable <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma\loads\<codeload#>\code Folder for each of thedevices to be loaded.G
Downloading ROM Code – continued G-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYThe Release Level of the ROM Code to be downloadedmust be the one specified for the Software Releaseinstalled in the BSS. The Release Level of the ROM Coderesident in the other devices in the BTS must also becorrect for the BSS Software Release being used.ROM Code must not be downloaded to a frame loadedwith code for a BSS Software Release with which it is notcompatible.This procedure should only be used to upgradereplacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used toupgrade all devices in a BTS.If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, etc., theupgrade should be done by the OMC–R using theDownLoad Manager.CAUTIONTable G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices ProcedurenStep Action1Click on the device to be loaded.NOTEMore than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on eachone to be downloaded or from the BTS Menu Bar Select Pull–down Menu, select the device itemthat applies.Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)2From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menu, select Status.– A Status Report Window will appear.3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last fourdigits in the filename of a device’s Binary ROM Code File.– By using this part of the filename, the ROM Code File can be matched to the device in whichit is to be loaded.4 Click OK to close the Status Window.5Click on the device to be loaded.NOTEROM Code is automatically selected for download from the <x>:\<lmf HomeDirectory>\version folder>\<Code Folder> specified by the NextLoad propertyin the bts–#.CDF File.To check the value of the NextLoad Property, click on Util > Examine > Display NextLoad.– A Pop–up Message will show the value of the NextLoad.table continued on next pageG
Downloading ROM Code – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP G-3PRELIMINARYTable G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices ProcedurenActionStep6From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menus, select Download > ROM.SIf the file matching the Hardware Binary Type of the device is found in the Code Folder, aStatus Report shows the result of the download.–Proceed to Step 11.SIf a file selection Window appears, select the ROM Code File manually.–Proceed to Step 7.7Double–click on the Version Folder with the desired Version Number for the ROM Code File (forexample: 2.16.0.x).8Double–click the Code Folder.– A list of ROM and RAM Code Files will be displayed.9! CAUTIONA ROM Code File with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrongHW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.Click on the ROM Code File with the filename that matches the device type and HW Bin Typenumber noted in Step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM Code File for a BBXwith a HW Bin Type of 0604).– The file should be highlighted.10 Click on the Load Button.– A Status Report Window is displayed showing the result of the download.NOTEIf the ROM Load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device,perform Steps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.11 Click OK to close the Status Window.12 From the LMF Window Menu Bar Tools Pull–down Menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA.13 In the left–hand pane of the window that opens, click on the BTS Number for the frame beingloaded (for example, BTS–14).14 On the list of versions displayed in the right–hand pane, click the Button next to the VersionNumber of the folder that was used for the ROM Code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and clickSave.– A Pop–up Message will appear showing the CDF has been updated.15 Click on the OK Button to dismiss the Pop–up Message.16 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM Code.table continued on next pageG
Downloading ROM Code – continued G-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices ProcedurenActionStep17 NOTERAM Code is automatically selected for download.From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menus, select Download > Code/Data to downloadRAM Code and DDS File Data.– A Status Report is displayed showing the result of the download.18 Click OK to close the Status Window.19 Observe the downloaded non–GLI Device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow).20 Click on the device that was loaded with code.21 From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menu, select Status.Verify that the correct ROM and RAM Version Numbers are displayed in the Status ReportWindow.22 Click OK to close the Status Window. G
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix H: In–Service Calibration Appendix ContentIntroduction H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment STabilization and Calibration H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1X Test Equipment Requirements H-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration H-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration H-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 Series E6380A Power Delta Calibration H-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration H-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration H-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration H-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration H-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesH
IntroductionFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-1PRELIMINARYPurposeThis procedure is a guide to performing Calibration of new BTSexpansion carriers while the system remains in service. This procedurealso supports BTS Recalibration following replacement of RF Chaincomponents while the remainder of the site stays in service.Motorola recommends performing this procedure during a MaintenanceWindow.This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 2–to–1 Combiners.The procedure can only be performed on one carrier of the BTS at atime. That is, LPA Modules 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D can be calibrated whileLPA Modules 3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D remain in service and vice versa.Equipment STabilization andCalibrationCalibration of the Communications Test Set (or equivalentTest Equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall Test Equipment Set.Calibrate the Test Equipment after it has been allowed towarm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.NOTEIf any component of the Test Equipment Set (for example,a Test Cable, RF Adapter, Signal Generator) has beenreplaced, the Test Equipment Set must be recalibrated.Failure to do so could introduce Measurement Errors thatultimately result in degradation of system performance.CAUTION1X Test EquipmentRequirementsIn–Service Calibration (ISC) of 1X carrier functions requires using thefollowing Test Equipment for the purposes indicated:SAn Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer to perform TX Calibration.SAn Advantest R3562 Signal Generator for R3267 Delta PowerCalibration.SAn Agilent E4406A Transmitter Test Set to perform TX CalibrationSAn Agilent E4432A Signal Generator for E4406A Delta PowerCalibration.SAn Agilent 8935 Series E6380A equipped with Option 200 (ifpurchased new) or option R2K (if retrofitted) to perform TXCalibration.H
Introduction – continued H-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYThe CDMA Communications System Analyzers listed above are capableof calibrating the BTS for both IS–95 A and B Mode Operation as wellas CDMA2000 1X Operation.IS–95A/B Communication Test Sets such as the HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3561L can not calibrate 1Xcarrier functions.NOTECalibration and Test Set–up for the HP 8921A/600 and AdvantestR3561L Test Sets is included only for situations where it is necessary touse them for Calibration of IS–95A/B Mode Operation.H
Power Delta CalibrationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-3PRELIMINARYIntroductionThe ISC Procedure has several differences from a normal CalibrationProcedure. One of these is the use of a SpectrumAnalyzer/Communications Test Set instead of a Power Meter to measurepower.– Power Meters are Broadband Measurement Devices and cannot beused to measure power during ISC because other carriers areoperating.– A Spectrum Analyzer can be used because it measures power at agiven frequency.Measuring power using a Spectrum Analyzer is less accurate than usinga Power Meter, therefore, compensation is required for the AccuracyDifference (Delta) between the Power Meter and the Spectrum Analyzer.Agilent E4406A Power DeltaCalibrationThe Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester and E4432B Signal GeneratorTest Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1Xas well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration isperformed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate theReference Signal used to calculate the Power Delta offset. After theOffset Value has been calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable InsertionLoss Value in the LMF.Preliminary Agilent Test Equipment Set–upTo provide proper operation during Power Delta Calibration, ensure thatthe E4406A and E4432B are connected as shown in Figure F-18.Power Delta CalibrationPerform the procedure in Table H-1 to perform the Agilent E4406APower Delta Calibration Procedure.Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60minutes.– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “TestSet Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the SignalGenerator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep2Ensure that the E4406A and E4432B are connected as shown in Figure F-18.3Connect a short RF Cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT Connector the HP437 Power MeterPower Sensor.– Refer to Figure H-1.4Set the E4432B Signal Generator by performing the following actions.4a Press Preset to exit any modes for which the Signal Generator is configured.4b Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the Numeric Keypad.4c Using the Softkeys to the right of the screen, select the Frequency Range to be measured; forexample: MHz.4d Press Amplitude and, using the Numeric Keypad, set the Signal Amplitude to 0 (zero).4e Using the Softkeys, set the measurement type to dBm.5On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF ON.– Note that the RF On/Off Status in the Screen Display changes.6Measure and record the Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter as result.A____________________7On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF OFF.– Note that the RF On/Off Status in the Screen Display changes.8Disconnect the short RF Cable from the HP437 Power Meter Power Sensor, and connect it to theRF INPUT Connector on the E4406A Transmitter Tester.– Refer to Figure H-2.* IMPORTANTDo not change the Frequency and Amplitude Settings on the E4432B when performing thefollowing actions.9Set the E4406A by performing the following actions.9a Press Preset to exit any modes for which the Transmitter Tester is configured.9b Press MODE and, using the Softkeys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne.9c Press MEASURE and, using the Softkeys, select spectrum.9d Press Frequency and, using the Softkeys, select Center Frequency.9e Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the Numeric Keypad.9f Using the Softkeys, select the Frequency Range to be measured; for example, MHz.9g Press Input/Output and, using the Softkeys, select Input Atten.9h Using the Numeric Keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-5PRELIMINARYTable H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep 9i Using the Softkeys, select External Atten and then select Mobile. 9j Using the Numeric Keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB. 9k Using the Softkeys, select Base. 9l Using the Numeric Keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB.9m Press MEASURE and, using the Softkeys, select Channel Power.10 On the E4432B Signal Generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF ON.– Note that the RF On/Off status in the Screen Display changes.11 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A Screen Display and record it as Result B.B____________________.12 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF OFF.– Note that the RF On/Off status in the Screen Display changes.13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Agilent measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmNOTEThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6. PowerSensorAgilent E4432B and E4406AShort RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTPUTFigure H-1: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent E4432B to HP437H
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYShort RF CableRF INPUTAgilent E4432B and E4406ARF OUTPUTFigure H-2: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406AH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-7PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3267 Power DeltaCalibrationThe Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer and R3562 Signal GeneratorTest Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1Xas well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration isperformed on the R3267. After the Offset Value has been calculated, addit to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.Preliminary Advantest Test Equipment Set–upTo provide proper operation during Power Delta Calibration, ensure thatthe R3267 is connected to the R3562 as shown in Figure F-19.Power Delta CalibrationPerform the procedure in Table H-2 to perform the Advantest R3267Power Delta Calibration Procedure.Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEWarm-up Test Equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to this procedure.– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “TestSet Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Ensure that the R3267 and R3562 are connected as shown in Figure F-19.2Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located on the right side of the Control Panel.3Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.4On the CRT, select RX Control by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.5On the CRT, select Frequency Set–up by pressing ACTIVE Key 3.6On the CRT, highlight Frequency by adjusting the DISPLAY CONTROL Knob.7 Press FREQ Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.8Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.9Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.10 Set the level to 0 dBm using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.11 On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Modulation.– If OFF is not highlighted, press the ACTIVE Key 5 to toggle it OFF.12 On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Output.– If OFF is not highlighted, press the ACTIVE Key 6 to toggle it OFF.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep13 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the SignalGenerator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.14 Connect the RF Cable from the R3562 Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the Power Sensor.15 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.16 Record the Power Meter Reading as result A.A________________________17 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to OFF by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.18 Connect the RF Cable from R3562 Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the R3267 SpectrumAnalyzer INPUT Port. – Refer to Figure H-4.19 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.20 On the R3267, press the POWER Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.21 Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.22 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.23 On the CRT, select dB/div by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.24 On the CRT, select 10 dB/div by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.25 Press the FREQ Key in ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.26 Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.27 On the CRT, select more 1/2 by pressing ACTIVE Key 7.28 Press the Preselector CRT Menu Key to highlight 3.66G.29 Press the POWER Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.30 Press the SPAN Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.31 On the CRT, select Zero Span by pressing ACTIVE Key 2.32 Press the COUPLE Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.33 On the CRT, select RBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE Key 3.34 Set RBW to 30 kHz using Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.35 On the CRT, select VBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE Key 2.36 Set VBW to 1 MHz using Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-9PRELIMINARYTable H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep37 Press the MKR Key in the DISPLAY CONTROL section of the Control Panel.38 On the CRT, select Normal Marker by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.39 Record the Marker Level reading as Result B.B________________________40 Press Single in ENTRY Section of Control Panel.41 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.7 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmNOTEThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6. PowerSensorAdvantest R3562 and R3267Short RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTFigure H-3: Delta Calibration Set–up – Advantest R3562 to HP437H
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3562 and R3267Short RF CableRF OUTRF INFigure H-4: Delta Calibration Set–up – Advantest R3562 to R3267H
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-11PRELIMINARYAgilent 8935 Series E6380APower Delta CalibrationThe Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) Communications Test Setmodified with either Option 200 or R2K and E4432B Signal GeneratorTest Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1Xas well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration isperformed on the Agilent 8935. After the Offset Value has beencalculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.Perform the procedure in Table H-3 to perform the Agilent 8935 PowerDelta Calibration Procedure.Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “TestSet Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the SignalGenerator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF Cable between the Agilent 8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437 PowerSensor.– Refer to Figure H-5.3Set the Agilent 8935 Signal Source as follows:– Measure Mode to CDMA Gen– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency– CW RF Path to IQ– Output Port to Dupl– Data Source to Random– Amplitude to 0 dBm4Measure and record the Power Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter.5Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.A ________________________.6Turn off the Agilent 8935 Signal Source Output, and disconnect the HP437.NOTELeave the settings on the Source Agilent 8935 for convenience in the following steps.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep7Connect the short RF Cable between the Agilent 8935 Duplex Out Port and the RF–IN/OUT Port.– Refer to Figure H-6.8Ensure that the Source Agilent 8935 Settings are the same as in Step 3.9Set the Agilent 8935 as follows:– Measure Mode to CDMA Anl– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency– Input Attenuation to 0 dB– Input Port to RF–IN– Gain to Auto– Anl Dir to Fwd10 Turn on the Agilent 8935 Signal Output.11 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.12 Measure and record the Channel Power Reading on the measuring Agilent 8935 as Result B.B ________________________13 Turn off the Agilent 8935 Signal Output and disconnect the equipment.14 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmNOTEThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6. PowerSensorAgilent Agilent 8935DUPLEX OUT Short RF CableHP437BSENSORFW00805Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent 8935 to HP437H
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-13PRELIMINARYAgilent E6380AShort RF CableDUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUTFW00806Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent 8935 to Agilent 8935H
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYHP 8921A Power DeltaCalibrationUse the HP 8921A Communications Test Set to measure power duringISC only for IS–95A and B Operation of 800 MHz Systems. After theOffset Value has been calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable InsertionLoss Value.Perform the procedure in Table H-4 to perform the HP 8921A PowerDelta Calibration Procedure.This procedure requires two HP 8921A CommunicationTest Sets.NOTETable H-4: HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes. After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment asdescribed in the “Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the SignalGenerator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF Cable between the HP 8921A Duplex Out Port and the HP437 Power Sensor.Refer to Figure H-7.3Set the HP 8921A Signal Source as follows:– Measure Mode to CDMA Generator– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency– CW RF Path to IQ– Output Port to Dupl– Data Source to Random– Amplitude to 0 dBm4Measure and record the Power Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter.5Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.A ________________________.6Turn off the source HP 8921A Signal Output, and disconnect the HP437.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP 8921A for convenience in the following steps.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-15PRELIMINARYTable H-4: HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep7Connect the short RF Cable between the source HP 8921A Duplex Out Port and the measuringHP 8921A RF–IN Port.– Refer to Figure H-8.8Ensure that the source HP 8921A Settings are the same as in Step 3.9Set the measuring HP 8921A as follows:– Measure Mode to CDMA Anl– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency– Input Attenuation to 0 dB– Input Port to RF–IN– Gain to Auto– Analyzer Direction to Fwd10 Turn on the source HP 8921A Signal Output.11 Measure and record the Channel Power Reading on the measuring HP 8921A as Result B.B ________________________12 Turn off the source HP 8921A Signal Output and disconnect the equipment.13 Compute the Delta between HP437 and HP 8921A using the following formula.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmNOTEThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6. Short RF CableHP 8921ADUPLEXOUTHP437BPowerSensorSENSORFW00801Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Set–up – HP 8921A to HP437H
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-16 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYMeasurement HP 8921A Source HP 8921AShort RF CableDUPLEXOUTRFIN/OUT FW00802Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Set–up – HP 8921A to HP 8921AH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-17PRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465 Power DeltaCalibrationUse the Advantest R3465 Spectrum Analyzer to measure power duringISC only for IS–95A and B Operation. After the Offset Value has beencalculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.Perform the procedure in Table H-5 to perform the Advantest 3465Power Delta Calibration Procedure.Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “TestSet Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located below the CRT Display.2Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.3Press the CDMA Sig CRT Menu Key.4Press the FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.5Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad Entry Keys.6Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.8Verify that the Mod CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.– If it is highlighted, press the Mod Key to toggle it OFF.9Verify that the Output CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF,– If it is highlighted, press the Output Key to toggle it OFF.10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the SignalGenerator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.11 Connect the RF Cable from the R3561L CDMA Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the Power Sensor.– Refer to Figure H-9.12 Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle the Output to ON.13 Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.A________________________.14 Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle the Output to OFF.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-18 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep15 Connect the RF Cable from the R3561L Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the R3465 INPUT Port.– Refer to Figure H-10.16 Press the Output CRT Menu Key to change the Output to ON.17 Press the CW Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.18 Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.20 Press the dB/div CRT Menu Key.21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT Menu Key.22 Press the FREQ Key in ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad Entry Keys.24 Press the more 1/2 CRT Menu Key.25 Press the Preselector CRT Menu Key to highlight 3.0G.26 Press the FORMAT Key in the Display Control area of the Control Panel.27 Press the TRACE CRT Menu Key.28 Press the AVG A CRT Menu Key.29 Set AVG to 20 using Keypad Entry Keys.30 Press the return CRT Menu Key.31 Press the SPAN Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.32 Press the Zero Span CRT Menu Key.33 Press the BW Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.34 Press the RBW CRT Menu Key to highlight MNL. using Keypad Entry Keys enter 30 kHz.35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using Keypad Entry Keys.36 Press the VBW CRT Menu Key to highlight MNL.37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using Keypad Entry Keys.38 Press the Marker ON Key in the Display Control area of the Control Panel.table continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-19PRELIMINARYTable H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedurenActionStep39 Record the Marker Level reading as Result B.B________________________40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmNOTEThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration. Refer to Step 4in Table H-6. Advantest PowerSensorRF OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORR3561LFW00803Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Set–up – R3561L to HP437R3561LRF OUTINPUTShort RF CableR3465FW00804Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Set–up – R3561L to R3465AdvantestH
Power Delta Calibration – continued H-20 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYNotesH
In–Service CalibrationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-21PRELIMINARYIn–Service CalibrationThis feature does NOT have Fault Tolerance at this time.The system has no safe–guards to prevent actions that willput the BTS out of service. If possible, perform thisprocedure during a Maintenance Window.Perform the procedures in this section precisely, otherwisethe entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansionhardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL State.The operator must be trained in the LMF Operation priorto performing this procedure.CAUTIONPrerequisitesSAny applicable expansion hardware has been added in the CBSCDatabase, and a CDF that includes the additions has been generated.SAny expansion devices have been inserted into the SCCP Cage andare in the OOS_MANUAL State at the CBSC MM.SThe site specific CDF (with any expansion hardware) and CAL Fileshave been loaded onto the LMF.SThe LMF has the same Device Binary Code and DDS Files as theCBSC.Do not download code or data to any cards other than thosebeing worked on. Downloading code or data to other cardswill take the site OUT OF SERVICE.The Code File Version Numbers must match the currentBSS Software Release Version Numbers required for theequipped devices. If the numbers do not match, the sitemay go OUT OF SERVICE.It is mandatory that the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.CDFFiles on the LMF Computer for this BTS are copies of thecorresponding files created in the CBSC Database. Refer toTable 3-3.The CAL File loaded on the LMF Computer for this BTSmust have come from the CBSC.CAUTIONH
In–Service Calibration – continued H-22 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYSTest Equipment has been connected as shown in Figure H-11 orFigure H-12.SAn RFDS (or as a minimum, a Directional Coupler), whose Loss isalready known, must be in the applicable TX Antenna Path to performthe In–service Calibration.STest Equipment has been calibrated after a 60–minute warm–up.SA short RF Cable and two BNC–N Adapters are available to performCable Calibration.SN–SMA Cable Adapters are available to connect to TRDC or DRDCBTS CPLD Connectors, and are included in Test Cable Insertion LossMeasurements.SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed.– Refer to Table H-1, Table H-2, Table H-3, Table H-4, or Table H-5.H
In–Service Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-23PRELIMINARYTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET–UPTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF INPUT 50Ω,INPUT 50Ω,OR RF IN/OUTFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC BTS CPLDCONNECTOR.RF INPUT50 ΩAgilent E4406AINPUT 50 ΩAdvantest R3267RXANTENNACONNECTORTXANTENNACONNECTOR2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATORANTENNAANTENNAAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)RF IN/OUTHP–IB TOGPIBBOXGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE:THE AGILENT 8935 MUST BE EQUIPPED WITH OPTION 200 OR R2KTO PERFORM 1X TX TESTING .Figure H-11: TX Calibration Test Set–up – Agilent E4406A, Advantest R3267, and Agilent 8935 with Option 200 or R2K (IS–95A/B and 1X CDMA 2000)H
In–Service Calibration – continued H-24 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET–UPTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF IN/OUTOR INPUT 50ΩFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC BTS CPLDCONNECTOR.RXANTENNACONNECTORTXANTENNACONNECTOR2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATORANTENNAANTENNAHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSRFIN/OUTGPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)RFIN/OUTAdvantest Model R3465INPUT 50ΩGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITFigure H-12: TX Calibration Test Set–up – HP 8921A/600 w/PCS Interface (1.9 GHz), HP 8921A/600 (800 MHz), and Advantest R3465 (IS–95A/B only)H
In–Service Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-25PRELIMINARYPerform the procedure in Table H-6 to perform the In–ServiceCalibration.Table H-6: In–Service Calibration ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Set–up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:1a Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF Icon on the Windows Desktop.1b Click Tools > Options from the Menu Bar in the LMF Application Window.1c In the LMF Options Window, check only the applicable Communications System AnalyzerCheck Box on the Test Equipment Tab.1d Ensure that the GPIB Address is 18.1e Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.1f Click the Apply Button.1g Select the BTS Options Tab in the LMF Options Window.1h Check the In–Service Calibration Check Box.1i Click the Apply Button.1j Click the Dismiss Button to close the LMF Options Window.2Log into the target BTS:2a Select the target BTS Icon.2b Click the Login Button at the Login Screen.3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration Function:3a Click Util > Cable Calibration... in the BTS Menu Bar in the Main Window.3b Set the desired Channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL from the Cable CalibrationWindow Pull–down Menu.3c Click the OK Button to perform Cable Calibration.3d Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the Test Cable Insertion Loss Measurement.NOTEThe measured value is input automatically to the Test Cable Insertion Loss File.To view the Test Cable Insertion Loss File, click Util > Examine > Cable Loss from the BTSMenu Bar.table continued on next pageH
In–Service Calibration – continued H-26 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-6: In–Service Calibration ProcedurenActionStep4Add the Communications System Analyzer Power Delta to the TX Cable Loss.4a In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Cable Loss... > TX.4b Add the value computed in Table H-4, Table H-5, or Table H-3 to the TX Cable Loss.NOTEEnsure to include the sign of the value.The following examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actualreadings:– Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20dBm– Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm– Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm– Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX Tests:5a In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss... from the Menu Bar in the MainWindow.5b Select the TX Coupler Loss Ta,b if not in the foreground.5c Enter the appropriate Coupler Loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of the BTS Installation.5d Click the Save Button.5e Click the Dismiss Button to close the window.5f To view the Coupler Loss File, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss in the BTS Menu Bar.6Input the Coupler Loss for the RX Tests:6a In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss... from the Menu Bar in the MainWindow.6b Select the RX Coupler Loss Tab, if not in the foreground.6c Enter the appropriate Coupler Loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of the BTS Installation.6d Click the Save Button.6e Click the Dismiss Button to close the window.6f To view the Coupler Loss File, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss in the BTS Menu Bar.table continued on next pageH
In–Service Calibration – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP H-27PRELIMINARYTable H-6: In–Service Calibration ProcedurenActionStep7If it was not previously done, have the CBSC Operator put the Redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.! CAUTIONBe sure to download OOS devices only.– Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE and can result in dropped calls.The Code File Version Numbers must match the Version Numbers on the other cards in the frame.If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.NOTEBe sure to include the Redundant BBX in Steps 8, 9, and 10.8Download code and data to the target devices:8a In the LMF Window Menu Bar, click Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA to set the CodeVersion that will be downloaded.8b Check the appropriate Code Version in the Pop–up Window and click the Save Button to close.8c Select the target BBX(s) on the SCCP Cage picture.8d In the BTS Menu Bar, click Device > Download > Code/Data to start downloading code and data.! CAUTIONPerform the All Cal/Audit Procedure on OOS devices only.9Run the All Cal/Audit Procedure:9a Select the target BBX(s) on the SCCP Cage picture.9b In the BTS Menu Bar, click Tests > All Cal/Audit... from the Menu Bar in the Main Window.9c Select the target carrier and confirm the Channel Number in the Pop–up Window.9d Leave the Verify BLO Check Box checked.9e Ensure that the Test Pattern Box shows Pilot.9f Click the OK Button to start Calibration.9g Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS Antenna Port.9h Connect to the DRDC or TRDC BTS CPL Port associated with the on–screen prompted AntennaPort.10 Save the result, and download the BLO Data to the target BBX(s):– Click the Save Result Button on the result screen.–– The window closes automatically.11 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF Session:11a In the BTS Menu Bar, click Select > Logout to close the BTS Connection.11b Close the LMF Application Program by selecting File > Exit from the Window Menu Bar.table continued on next pageH
In–Service Calibration – continued H-28 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable H-6: In–Service Calibration ProcedurenActionStep12 Disconnect all Test Cables from the BTS.13 reconnect RFDS Cables or Termination Loads, as applicable, to the DRDC or TRDC BTS CPLPorts used for the Calibration.14 Advise the CBSC to enable the target device(s).15 Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.– Refer to Table 4-12. H
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix I: Packet Backhaul Configuration Appendix ContentBTS Router Initial Configuration I-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview I-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Setup I-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General I-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Router Serial Communication I-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files I-7 . . . . . . . . . . Downloading Overview I-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites I-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP File Transfer from the OMC–R I-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card I-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview I-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOS Version Verification and File Sequence Position I-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canned Configuration File Installation I-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 1: Using a TFTP Server to Load to CF Memory Card I-15 . . . . . . Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader to Load CF Memory Card I-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version I-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . Background I-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment and Software Required for Verification Methods I-41 . . . . . . . . Required Publications I-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 1: Replacement of Installed Router CF Card IOS Data I-42 . . . . . . Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacement of Installed IOS Version and Changing File Sequence Position I-50 . . . . . . . Change CF Memory Card File Sequence to Place IOS File First on the Card I-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version I-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction I-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment and Software Required for Verification I-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Publications I-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 1: In–Router Verification and Replacement of Installed ROMMON Version I-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 2: Verification and Replacement of Installed ROMMON Version Using a CF Memory Card Reader I-71 . . . . . . . . . . . Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version I-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON I-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction I-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Recovery from Boot to ROMMON I-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Recovery from Boot to ROMMON I-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Table of Contents – continued1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRecovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON I-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address I-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address I-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites I-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering or Changing FE Interface IP Addresses I-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Router Canned Configuration File I-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining the Latest Configuration File Content I-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration File Examples I-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Blue” BTS Router Canned Configuration I-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Red” BTS Router Canned Configuration I-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for Site Turn–over I-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for Site Turn–over I-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the Site to OMC–R Control I-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to Do Next I-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
BTS Router Initial ConfigurationFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-1PRELIMINARYOverviewThis appendix contains information and operations related to loading anMWR 1941 BTS Router with the minimum standard (canned)configuration necessary for network communications. Once the BTSRouter is communicating on the network, the full, site-specific,Operational Configuration can be downloaded to the BTS Router overthe network. This appendix includes sections on:STerminal Set–upSDownloading the Canned BTS Router Configuration FilesSVerifying the IOS Canned Version of CF Memory CardSReplacing the installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS VersionSVerify and upgrade the ROMMON VersionSRecovery from the BTS Router Boot to ROMMONSEntering or changing the Router FE Interface IP AddressSPreparation for Site Turn–overI
Terminal Setup I-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYGeneralThis section provides the procedures to configure and save a TerminalSession for communicating with the MWR 1941 BTS Router. TerminalSettings are the same as those used for BTS Card/Module Man–MachineInterface (MMI) Communication Sessions. The procedures are for aPentiumr Processor–based Computer operating with either Windows 98Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000..Using the LMF ComputerLMF Computer Platforms can be used for communicating with the BTSRouters, and the MMI Terminal Connection, created for BTSCard/Module Optimization Actions, will operate with the BTS Routers.See the “Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session” section ofthis appendix for additional Interface Hardware required for BTS RouterCommunication..Terminal SettingsPerform the procedure in Table I-1 to create a named HyperTerminalConnection for BTS Router interface and generate a Windows DesktopShortcut for it.There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows98 in the menus and screens used for creating aHyperTerminal Connection. In the following procedure,items applicable to:SWindows 2000 will be identified with Win2000SWindows 98 will be identified with Win98NOTETable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionnStep Action1From the Windows Start Menu, select Programs > Accessories2Perform one of the following:SFor Win2000, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal.SFor Win98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal Folder, and then doubleclick on the Hypertrm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose Button.– This is required the first time a HyperTerminal Connection is configured, even if a modem isnot to be used.SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.table continued on next pageI
Terminal Setup – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-3PRELIMINARYTable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionnActionStep3When the Connection Description Box opens, perform the following actions.3a Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, BTSRTR Session, MMI) in theName: Window.3b Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: Chooser Window.3c Click OK.4From the Connect using: Pick List in the Connect To Box displayed, perform the followingactions.4a Select the RS–232 Port to be used for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win2000 or Directto Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 – Win98).4b Click OK.5In the Port Settings Tab of the COM# Properties Window displayed, configure the RS–232 PortSettings as follows:SBits per Second: 9600SData Bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop Bits: 1SFlow Control: None6 Click OK.7With the HyperTerminal Window still open and the connection running, select:File > Properties8Click the Settings Tab, click the arrow in the Emulation Window, and select VT100 from thePull–down Menu.9Click the ASCII Set–up Button, uncheck all boxes in the ASCII Set–up Window that appears,and click OK.10 Click OK for the Connection Properties Box.11 Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save12 Close the HyperTerminal Window by selecting:File > Exit13 Click the Yes Button to disconnect when prompted.table continued on next page I
Terminal Setup – continued I-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionnActionStep14 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal Folder Window is still open (Win98), proceed to Step 16. ORSFrom the Windows Start Menu, select Programs > Accessories15 Perform one of the following:SFor Win2000, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed Mouse Buttons. ORSFor Win98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal Folder.16 Highlight the newly–created Connection Icon by moving the cursor over it (Win2000) or clickingon it (Win98).17 Right click and drag the highlighted Connection Icon to the Windows Desktop and release theright Mouse Button.18 From the Pop–up Menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.19 If desired, reposition the Shortcut Icon for the new connection by dragging it to another locationon the Windows Desktop.NOTEThe Shortcut Icon can now be double–clicked to open a BTS Router or BTS Card/Module MMIHyperTerminal Session without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels. I
Terminal Setup – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-5PRELIMINARYBTS Router SerialCommunicationFor those procedures that require Serial Communication with BTSRouters, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to initiate theCommunication Session. This procedure calls out the LMF ComputerPlatform, but any VT100–equivalent terminal or computer equippedwith Terminal Emulation Software and a Hardware Serial Connectormay be used.Required ItemsThe following items are required to perform the verification:SLMF Computer Platform or equivalent. – Refer to this manual for requirements.SEight–conductor (four–pair, unshielded twisted pair is acceptable)Rollover Cable, two 8–contact Modular Plugs.– Refer to Figure I-1 for Cable Wiring Requirements.SAdapter, DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug, Global ComputerSupplies C4717 or equivalent.– Refer to Figure I-2 for Adapter Wiring Requirements.8–contact PlugContact Numbering(Insertion End)1234567812345678123456788–contactModularPlug8–contactModularPlugLockingClipFigure I-1: Wiring Diagram, BTS Router Communication Rollover CableI
Terminal Setup – continued I-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYAdapterDB–9 Receptacle Socket Numbering(Mating Side)Adapter8–contact ReceptacleContact Numbering(Mating Side)1234567891234567812345678912345678NCNCDB–9Receptacle8–contactModularReceptacleFigure I-2: Wiring Diagram, DB–9 Plug–to–8–Contact Modular Plug AdapterTable I-2: Establishing BTS Router Serial CommunicationnStep Action1If it has not been done, start the computer and allow it to complete the Boot Process.2If a named HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Router Serial Communication or BTSCard/Module MMI Communication has not been created on the LMF Computer, create one asdescribed in Table I-1 in the “Terminal Set–up” section of this appendix.3Connect the computer to the BTS Router as shown in Figure I-3.4Start the named HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Router Communication Sessions by doubleclicking on its Windows Desktop Shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows Desktop Shortcut was not created for the Communication Session, access theconnection from the Windows Start Menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (for example, BTSRTR)>5Once the connection window opens, establish communication with the BTS Router by pressingthe computer Enter Key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. I
Terminal Setup – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-7PRELIMINARYTo BTSRouterCONSOLEreceptacleCOM1ORCOM2LMF COMPUTEROR EQUIVALENTOPTOATP0001–0ROLLOVERCABLEDB9–TO–RJ48CADAPTERFigure I-3: LMF Computer Connections to BTS RouterI
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files I-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYDownloading OverviewAfter they are generated on the OMC–R, the BTS Router CannedConfiguration Files must be transferred to another computer platformfrom which they can be installed into the BTS Routers. A number ofprocedures may be used to move the Canned Configuration Files fromthe OMC–R to a platform from which they can be loaded into the BTSRouters. Some alternatives are:1. If a Floppy Diskette drive is available at the OMC–R, such as theone for UNO Workstations, the Configuration Files can betransferred to an LMF Computer or similar machine using the CDFFile Transfer Procedure in the Preparing the LMF section of thismanual. Directories identified in Table I-3 must be used rather thanthose in the CDF File Transfer Procedure.2. If a Windows–based Server Connection is available in the operator’snetwork and it can provide an FTP or Telnet Connection to theOMC–R, files may be transferred by either the FTP or Telnetmethods.3. If a Dial–up Connection is available for accessing the OMC–R, anFTP or Telnet Session may be possible to transfer files to thecomputer used to load the CF Memory Cards.The procedure provided in this section covers FTP Transfer using aWindows–based Server in the operator’s network. Coordinate with theLocal Network Administrator to determine the method and procedure touse on a specific network.PrerequisitesThe following must be obtained from the Local Network Administratorbefore performing the Canned Configuration File FTP Procedure inTable I-3:SUser ID and Password to log onto the OMC–RSName of the subdirectory where the specific BTS Router GroupCanned Configuration Files to be downloaded were created.FTP File Transfer from theOMC–RThis procedure uses the Windows–based LMF Computer Platform todownload BTS Router Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R.Perform the procedure in Table I-3.Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnStep Action1If it has not been done, create a directory on the LMF Computer where the BTS Router CannedConfiguration Files will be stored.2If it has not been done, obtain the OMC–R Logon User ID and Password from the Local NetworkAdministrator.table continued on next pageI
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-9PRELIMINARYTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnActionStep3Connect the LMF Computer to the local network and log on.NOTEThis procedure uses the Command Line FTP Client supplied with Windows 98, Second Edition(Win98 SE) and Windows 2000 (Win2K); however, any commercially available FTP ClientApplication can be used.– Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operation of an alternative application.4Open a Command Line (MS DOS) Window by clicking on Start > Programs > CommandPrompt.5When the Command Line Window opens, change to the directory where the CannedConfiguration Files will be stored on the LMF Computer by entering:cd pathname– Where pathname = the path to the required directory.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\> cd Can_CfgC:\Can_Cfg>6Check the contents of the directory by entering the following command.dir– A response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\Can_Cfg>dir Volume in drive C is MAIN Volume Serial Number is F2AA–1721 Directory of C:\Can_Cfg>08/22/2002 03:46p <DIR> .08/22/2002 03:46p <DIR> ..08/22/2002 03:46p 2,223 btsrtr_canned.blue08/22/2002 03:47p 2,223 btsrtr_canned.red 2 File(s) 4,644 bytes 2 Dir(s) 2,556,045,312 bytes freeC:\Can_Cfg>7If either or both of the following files are found in the directory, delete them or move them toanother directory:–btsrtr_config.blue–btsrtr_config.redtable continued on next page I
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files – continued I-10 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnActionStep8Begin the FTP Session by entering the following command.FTP hostname– Where hostname = the OMC–R hostname or IP Address.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\Can_Cfg> FTP OMC–R–1C:\Can_Cfg>Connected to OMC–R–1.220 OMC–R–1 FTP Server (SunOS 5.6) ready.User (OMC–R–1:(none)):9Enter the User ID and Password when prompted, pressing the Enter Key after each.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:User (OMC–R–1:(none)): scadm331 Password required for scadm.Password:230 User scadm logged in.FTP>10 Change to the directory where the BTS Router Canned Configuration File Subdirectories arecreated.11 Verify that the present Working Directory by entering the following commands, pressing theEnter Key after each:cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configspwd– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs240 CWD command successful.FTP> pwd245 ”/home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs” is current directory.table continued on next pageI
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-11PRELIMINARYTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnActionStep12 Enter the ls Command to list the contents of the directory and ensure that the specific CannedConfiguration Directory Name provided by the administrator exists.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> ls200 PORT command successful.150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).Mon_Jul_2_01:55:07_CDT_2002Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002Tue_Aug_04_10:35:22_CDT_2002226 ASCII Transfer complete.FTP: 30 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 1.50Kbytes/sec.FTP>NOTEDirectory Names where Canned Configuration Files are located will consist of theweekday_month_day_time_year when the Canned Configuration Files were created on theOMC–R.13 Change to the directory specified for the BTS Router Group to be configured and list the directorycontents by entering the following, pressing the Enter Key after each command:cd weekday_month_day_time_yearls– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> cd Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002250 CWD command successful.FTP> ls200 PORT command successful.150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).btsrtr_canned.bluebtsrtr_canned.red226 ASCII Transfer complete.FTP: 39 bytes received in 0.05Seconds 0.78Kbytes/sec.FTP>table continued on next pageI
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files – continued I-12 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnActionStep14 Change to the Binary Transfer Mode and, if desired, turn on Hash Mark Printing for transferprogress by entering the following, pressing the Enter Key after each command:binhash– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> bin200 Type set to I.FTP> hashHash mark printing On FTP: (2048 bytes/hash mark).FTP>NOTEWith Win98 SE, turning on Hash Mark Printing can slow down File Transfer in certaincircumstances, but the Canned Configuration Files are quite small (approximately 2.5 KB) sothere should be little noticeable effect.15 Download the BTS Router Canned Configuration Files to the LMF Computer by performing thefollowing actions.15a Enter the following to download the first Canned Configuration File:get btsrtr_canned.blue– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> get btsrtr_canned.blue200 PORT command successful.150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.blue (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).#226 Binary Transfer complete.FTP: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.FTP>15b Enter the following to download the second BTS Router Canned Configuration File:get btsrtr_canned.red– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> get btsrtr_canned.red200 PORT command successful.150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.red (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).#226 Binary Transfer complete.FTP: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.FTP>table continued on next pageI
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-13PRELIMINARYTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RnActionStep16 Before terminating the FTP Session, open Windows Explorer and view the contents of thedirectory where the Canned Configuration Files are to be stored to ensure that the files are present.Perform the following actions.16a Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer.16b In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform one of the following depending on the LMFComputer Operating System:–Win98 SE: If necessary, expand the Directory Display for the drive where the CannedConfiguration File Storage Directory is located by clicking on the + next to the Drive Icon.–Win2K: Expand the User Profile and Directory Display for the drive where the CannedConfiguration File Storage Directory is located by clicking on the + next to each icon,respectively.16c Expand any subdirectories as required to display the directory folder where the CannedConfiguration Files are to be stored.16d Click on the Directory Folder Icon where the Canned Configuration Files are to be stored.16e In the right–hand pane, verify that the files btsrtr_canned.blue and btsrtr_canned.redappear.16f If the files appear, proceed to Step 17.16g If the files do not appear, repeat Step 15, its substeps, Step 16, and its substeps.17 Close Windows Explorer.18 In the Command Line Window, enter the bye Command to terminate the FTP Session.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:FTP> bye221 Goodbye.C:\Can_Cfg>19 Close the Command Line Window by entering the exit Command.20 BTS Router Canned Configuration Files are now ready for transfer to a BTS Router. I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card I-14 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYOverviewThis section covers the procedures and commands required to verify thatthe IOS Version loaded on BTS Router CF Memory Cards and copystandard Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Routers. Because of theset–up required and the length of some of the procedures, Motorolarecommends performing the actions covered in this section at a centrallocation to prepare the BTS Routers for installation prior to the site visit.IOS Version Verification andFile Sequence PositionVersion Verification The IOS Version loaded on the BTS Router CF Memory Card should beverified as the version required for operation on the network where theBTS Routers will be installed. If the loaded IOS Version is not correct, itcan be replaced with a different version. There are several methods available to accomplish Version Verification.These depend on the equipment and Software Applications the userselects to use in installing the Canned Configuration Files in the BTSRouters. Appropriate Verification Procedures are included in each of thetwo Canned Configuration Installation Methods covered in this section.Methods to change the loaded IOS Version are provided in the ChangeBTS Router IOS Version section of this appendix and are referenced atthe appropriate places in the Canned Configuration InstallationMethods..File Sequence Position During Initialization, the MWR 1941 Router will first search thestartup–config File for a Boot System Command Line telling it inwhat directory and file to find the Boot Loader. If this line is not found,the BTS Router will default to attempting to boot from the first file in itsFlash Memory. Flash Memory for the MWR 1941 is the CF Memory Card (SoftwareIdentifier slot0:). The Canned Configuration Files used for BTS Routerinstallation do not contain a Boot System Command Line because of theneed to maintain flexibility for IOS Version changes. Because of this, itis critical that the IOS File is the first file listed on the CF Memory Card.The Canned Configuration Installation Procedures contain Steps toassure that this is the case, and, if it is not, provide guidance to correctthe condition. It is important to remember that, if the BTS Router bootsand displays a rommon 1 > Prompt, the IOS File is missing, out ofsequence, has a corrupted Flash Memory Image, or thestartup–config File contains a Boot System Line that specifies amissing or incorrect IOS Pathname/Filename..I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-15PRELIMINARYCanned Configuration FileInstallationFilename and Installation Location Requirements The Canned Configuration Files for the BTS Routers must be copied tothe CF Memory Card. The filename of the file on the CF Memory Cardmust be canned–config. Canned Configuration File Location and Filename Requirements are aresult of Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) Actions during the process ofswitching a BTS from Packet to Circuit Mode. In this process, the MWCwill query the BTS Routers’ slot0: Directory for a file namedcanned–config. A missing or misnamed file will cause problems withexecution of the Mode–switching Process..Installation Methods The startup–config Configuration File used by the BTS Routerduring Initialization is stored in NVRAM. This is a memory deviceinternal to the BTS Router and is separate from the CF Memory Card.To install the Canned Configuration File so the BTS Router will use itduring Boot–up, the file must be copied into the startup–config Filein NVRAM.There are two methods available to accomplish this.:1. Using a TFTP Server Application to copy the Canned ConfigurationFile from the Windows–based LMF Computer to the CF MemoryCard installed in a BTS Router, and then copying it to thestartup–config File in the BTS Router’s NVRAM.2. Using a CF Memory Card Reader to copy the Canned ConfigurationFile to a CF Memory Card, and then, once the CF Memory Card isinstalled in the BTS Router, using a HyperTerminal CommunicationSession to copy the file from the CF Memory Card to thestartup–config File in the BTS Router’s NVRAM.Comparison of Methods Preparation for using the TFTP Server Application Method is extensiveand requires setting up simultaneous Serial and FE CommunicationSessions with the BTS Router. This method offers the advantage ofbeing able to verify IOS File Sequence Position immediately, andsupporting Direct File Transfers between the BTS Router and LMFComputer without removing the CF Memory Card. As an alternative, using a CF Memory Card Reader to copy the CannedConfiguration File to a CF Memory Card, and from there to thestartup–config File requires very little set–up. With this method, theIOS File Sequence Position can only be verified once the CF MemoryCard is installed in the BTS Router, and any file transfers between theBTS Router and LMF Computer require physically moving the CFMemory Card between the BTS Router and Card Reader..I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-16 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYProcedures to use Each Method Using the TFTP Server Application to copy the Canned ConfigurationFile to a CF Memory Card is covered in the Method 1 subsection.Performing the Transfer Process with a Card Reader is covered in theMethod 2 subsection. The applicable procedures for verifying the loadedIOS Version and File Sequence Position are included in each method..File Operations using a CF Memory Card Reader File Transfers should only be performed using the CF Memory CardReader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTSRouter using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CFMemory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Readercould result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation..Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using aWindows–based computer. Format CF Memory Cards onlyin a BTS Router.CAUTIONMethod 1: Using a TFTP Serverto Load to CF Memory CardRequired Equipment and SoftwareThe following items are required to perform this procedure:SA Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMFComputer Platform as specified in this manual.SOne of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File SystemBTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSOne of the following for the Windows–based computer:– Internal 10/100baseT Network Interface Card (NIC)– PCMCIA 10/100baseT NICI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-17PRELIMINARYSCable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)SCable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this appendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisappendixSA TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up theTFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation) such as:– Cisco TFTP Server– PumpKIN TFTP Server– Any other equivalent TFTP Server ApplicationSA copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for thenetwork in which the BTS Routers are to be installed. (Contact theNetwork Administrator or the Motorola Account Team for informationon obtaining the required MWR 1941 IOS Version.)SA +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router duringConfiguration File OperationsRequired MaterialsThe following material is required to perform this method:SMarking material to identify the BTS Router and CF Memory Cardwith the installed configuration (blue or red)Required PublicationsThe following publications are required to perform procedures in thissection:Sthis manual: 1X SC4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP manual(68P09262A58)SCellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine DocumentationSMWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01 I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-18 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYPreparation for Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer toCF Memory CardPreparation for a Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer consists ofthe following activities:1. Setting the LMF Computer NIC IP Address2. Creating a directory (folder) on the LMF Computer to be used for allTFTP File Transfers3. Installing the TFTP Server Application on the LMF Computer, andsetting the TFTP Server Application Root Directory to the directorycreated in 2, above4. Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for bothHyperTerminal (serial) and Ethernet Communication5. BTS Router Power–up and Initial Configuration for EthernetCommunicationThe following procedures are used to accomplish all of these preparatoryactions.Set LMF Computer NIC TCP/IP Address and Create theDefault TFTP Directory Perform the procedure in Table I-4 to set the NIC IP Address..If the IP Address for the LAN Connection on an LMFComputer is being changed to support TFTP Downloads toa BTS Router, the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address andSubnet Mask for the NIC must be restored before the LMFcan log into a BTS to perform an Optimization or ATP.IMPORTANT*There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows98 in the menus and screens used for setting or changing aNIC Connection. In the following procedure, itemsapplicable to:Windows 2000 will be identified withWin2000Windows 98 will be identified with Win98NOTETable I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP DirectorynStep Action1Start the computer.2Login and allow the computer to boot to the Desktop.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-19PRELIMINARYTable I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP DirectorynActionStep3Depending on the installed Operating System, from the Windows Start Menu, select one of thefollowing:SWin2000: Settings > Network and Dial–up ConnectionsSWin98: Settings > Control Panel and double–click Network.4Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed Operating System:SFor Win2000, in the list of displayed connections, locate the Local Area Network Connectionfor the NIC to be used for BTS Router Ethernet Communication.SFor Win98, in the Configuration Tab of the Network Dialog Box, locate the TCP/IPConnection for the installed NIC.– If TCP/IP does not appear in the displayed list of installed network components, refer to theOperating System Documentation and install TCP/IP.5Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed Operating System:SFor Win2000:– Highlight the connection for the NIC.– Right–click the highlighted connection.– Select Properties from the Pop–up Menu.SFor Win98:– Highlight the TCP/IP NIC Connection in the displayed list of installed network components.– Click the Properties Button.– Skip to Step 8.6 For Win2000 , in the Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box that appears:Sif Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is showing in the Components checked are used by thisconnection: List Box, proceed to Step 7.Sif Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is not showing in the Components checked are used by thisconnection: List Box, refer to the Operating System Documentation and install TCP/IP.7 For Win2000, if the Check Box next to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Entry is not checked, clickin the box to check it.8Perform one of the following:SWin2000:– Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Entry.– Click on the Properties Button below the Components checked are used by thisconnection: List Box.SWin98:– From the Tabs displayed in the TCP/IP Properties Dialog Box that opens, select the IPAddress Tab if it is not at the front.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-20 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP DirectorynActionStep9In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box that appears (Win2000) or the IPAddress Tab of the TCP/IP Properties Dialog Box (Win98), perform the following actions.9a If a black dot is not showing in the the Radio Button Circle next to Use the following IPAddress: (Win2000) or Specify an IP Address (Win98), click on the Radio Button.– A black dot will appear in the circle.9b If using an LMF Computer, record the IP Address and Subnet Mask used for LMF–BTSCommunication so they can be re–entered when TFTP Transfer Activities for the BTS Router arecompleted.9c Enter 100.100.100.1 in the IP Address: Box.9d Enter 255.255.255.252 in the Subnet Mask: Box.10 Click the OK Button for the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box (Win2000) orthe TCP/IP Properties Box (Win98).11 Click the OK Button for the Local Area Connection Properties Box (Win2000) or the NetworkBox (Win98).12 In Win98, click File > Close to close the Control Panel Window.13 Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.14 If the Default TFTP Directory is to be the same directory in which the files downloaded from theOMC–R are stored, proceed to Step 22.15 In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, locate the icon for the drive where the Default TFTPDirectory is to be created.16 Highlight the Drive Icon and click Files > New > Folder.17 While observing the new folder icon in the right–hand pane, type the name for the folder (forexample, TFTP_files), and press the Enter Key.18 In Windows Explorer, locate the directory where the Canned Configuration Files that weredownloaded from the OMC–R are stored.19 In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.20 Scroll the left–hand pane until the newly–created Default TFTP Directory is visible.21 In the right–hand pane, highlight the Canned Configuration Files and drag them to the DefaultTFTP Directory.22 In the left–hand pane, click on the Default TFTP Directory, and verify that the CannedConfiguration Files appear in the right–hand pane.23 Load a copy of the required BTS Router IOS Version into the Default TFTP Directory using FTP,Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk (file size is over 7 MB).24 Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer. I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-21PRELIMINARYInstall and Configure TFTP Server ApplicationTo obtain, install, and configure the Cisco or PumpKIN TFTP SoftwareApplications, refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure inCellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation Forother TFTP Server Applications, install and configure the applicationaccording to the manufacturer’s instructions..When entering the name of the TFTP Server RootDirectory while configuring the TFTP Server Application,be sure to use the name of the directory identified inTable I-4, Step 14, or created in Table I-4, Step 17, above.IMPORTANT*Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS RouterConnect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router by performing theprocedure in Table I-5 and referring to Figure I-4..Table I-5: Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for TFTP File TransfernStep Action1If the BTS Router has not been connected to a Power Source, perform the following actions. 1a Ensure that the +27V DC Power Source is not ON. 1b Connect the BTS Router to the +27V DC Power Source.2Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router as shown in Figure I-4, referring to the list ofrequired equipment in this section as required.3If the LMF Computer has not been started, turn it on, Login, and allow it to boot to the Desktop.4Start a HyperTerminal Communication Session for the BTS Router.– Refer to the procedure in Table I-2 of this appendix.5Start the TFTP Server Application as specified for the software.– Refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration –CDMA OnLine Documentation or the manufacturer’s instructions. I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-22 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTo BTSRouterCONSOLEreceptacleCOM1ORCOM2LMF COMPUTEROR EQUIVALENTROLLOVERCABLEDB9–TO–RJ48CADAPTERBTSRTR0025ETHERNETCROSSOVERCABLE10/100BASE TNIC PORTFAST ETHERNET PORT FE 0(SOFTWARE DESIGNATION FA0/0) CONSOLEPORTFigure I-4: LMF Computer TFTP Connections to BTS RouterI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-23PRELIMINARYBTS Router Power–up and Initial Configuration for EthernetCommunicationPerform the procedure in Table I-6 to apply power to the BTS Routerand set an Initial Configuration for Ethernet Communication.SEnsure that the required version of the IOS is loaded on the CFMemory Card.SEnsure that the CF Memory Card is installed in the BTS Router.Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration ProcedurenStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1Ensure that a CF Memory Card loaded with the Cisco IOS is installed in the BTS Router.– Refer to the BTS Router Card and Module Replacement section of the 1X SC4812T Lite BTSFRU manual (68P09262A60) for instructions to access the CF Memory Card Slot.* IMPORTANTIn Step 2, do not touch the computer keyboard until the BTS Router completes the Boot Process.The BTS Router buffers any keystrokes made during the Boot Process and interprets them ascommands to be executed immediately following completion of the Boot Process.2Apply power to the BTS Router and allow it to complete the Boot Process.SIf a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter Key and proceed to Step 3.Press RETURN to get started!SIf a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter Key:Basic management set–up configures only enough connectivityfor management of the system, extended set–up will ask youto configure each interface on the systemWould you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]: noCisco Internetwork Operating System SoftwareIOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobinRouter>table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-24 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration ProcedurenActionStep3At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXECMode:enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router>enableRouter#4At the Router# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the ConfigureSubmode:configure terminal– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.Router(config)#– The BTS Router is now in the Global Configuration Mode and ready to accept configurationchanges entered from the keyboard.5At the Global Configuration Mode Prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing theEnter Key after each command:hostname btsrtr1interface fa0/0ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252speed 100duplex fullno shutdownline con 0exec–timeout 0 0no Loginline vty 0 4no Login– Responses similar to the following will be displayed:Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex fullBTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdownBTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#no LoginBTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4BTSRTR1(config–line)#no LoginBTSRTR1(config–line)#table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-25PRELIMINARYTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration ProcedurenActionStep6Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt byholding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).– A response similar to the following will be displayed.BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consoleBTSRTR1#NOTEEntering exit twice and pressing the Enter Key after each entry, will also complete theConfiguration Process and return the BTS Router to the Privileged EXEC Mode.7Verify that Port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP Address by entering the followingcommand.show ip interface brief– A response similar to the following will be displayed.BTSRTR1#sh ip int brInterface IP Address OK? Method Status ProtocolFastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES manual up upSerial0:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downFastEthernet0/1 unassigned YES unset administratively down downSerial1:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downBTSRTR1#8The BTS Router is now configured for Ethernet Communication on FE 0, and the CannedConfiguration File can be transferred by TFTP.– Proceed to Table I-7. Verifying IOS Version and Canned Configuration File TFTPTransfer to the BTS RouterPrerequisites – The following is required prior to performing thisprocedure.:SA copy of the required MWR 1941 Router IOS Version file isinstalled in the Default TFTP Directory. Transfer the file to the LMFComputer using FTP, Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk;file size is approximately 7–8 MB.IOS Verification and Canned Configuration File Transfer – Performthe procedure in Table I-7 to verify that the loaded IOS Version andtransfer the Canned Configuration Files from the LMF Computer to theBTS Router CF Memory Card..I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-26 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYMWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Versionmwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This Routermodel will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.IMPORTANT*This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS RouterOperation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Routerinitialization, operation, and programming informationand procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile EdgeRouter Software Configuration Guide; part number78–13983–01.Have this publication available for reference whileperforming this procedure.NOTETable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernStep Action! CAUTIONIf Personal Firewall and/or Intrusion Detection Software such as Black ICE is running on the LMFComputer, shut it down before performing this procedure.– If this is not done, the TFTP Transfer Process will not operate.1On the LMF Computer, if it has not been done, start the TFTP Server according to themanufacturer’s directions.– Refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in the Cellular System Administration –CDMA OnLine Documentation.* IMPORTANTMWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later.– This Router model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.2If a HyperTerminal Communication Session with the BTS Router is not running, start one byperforming the procedure in Table I-2.3In the HyperTerminal Window, the BTS Router must be in the Privileged EXEC Mode, asindicated by a number sign at the end of the prompt:BTSRTR1#4Ensure that the Ethernet Crossover Cable is connected between the LMF Computer NIC Port andthe BTS Router FE 0 Port.– Refer to Figure I-4.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-27PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep5Begin verification that the CF Memory Card contains the correct version of the Cisco IOS byentering the following command.dir slot0:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dir slot0:Directory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Mar 01 1993 00:11:34 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24879104 bytes free)BTSRTR1#6Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.– The IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present WorkingDirectory has been changed by using the cd Command.7If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return tothe default setting.– If slot0: is included in the command, be sure to include the colon (:) after slot0 when typingthe command.– The IOS Filename will be similar to the following example.mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bintable continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-28 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep8Direct the BTS Router to show the Version Information by entering the following command.show version– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RE-LEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOP-MENT SOFTWAREROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASESOFTWARE (fc1)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin”cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes ofmemory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#9Compare the IOS Filename returned in Step 5 and the second line of the Version Information inStep 8.– Note the correspondence between the filename and IOS Version information.SIf the IOS Filename from the CF Memory Card returned in Step 5 is not different than thefilename of the required IOS Version loaded in the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory,proceed to Step 11.SIf the IOS Filename from the CF Memory Card returned in Step 5 is different than the filenameof the required IOS Version loaded in the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory, proceed toStep 10.10 Perform the procedure in Table I-13 to load the required version, then proceed to Step 11.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-29PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep! CAUTIONThe File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs thatplace the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,that do not list directory contents alphabetically.11 Verify that the IOS Version is correct.SIf the IOS Version is correct and there is more than one file loaded on the CF Memory Card,ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.SIf it is not correct, proceed to Step 12.12 Prepare the LMF for the correct IOS Version.12a Backup all files on the CF Memory Card to the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory byperforming Step 3 through Step 6 of Table I-13.12b Perform Step 25 through Step 30 of Table I-13, as applicable.12c Type the following to delete a possible Boot System Line in the startup–config File, pressingthe Enter Key after the command and at each prompt to confirm the filename and deletionoperation.del nvram:startup–config– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#del nvram:startup–configDelete filename [startup–config]? Delete nvram:startup–config? [confirm][OK]BTSRTR1#NOTEEnsure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.12d Verify that the startup–config File size has been reduced to a minimum by entering thefollowing command.dir nvram:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dir nvram:Directory of nvram:/ 53 –rw– 5 <no date> startup–config 54 –––– 5 <no date> private–config57336 bytes total (57274 bytes free)BTSRTR1#table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-30 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep13 At the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following command.copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config– Where color = blue or red, as applicable.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []?14 At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF ComputerNIC:100.100.100.1– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [canned–config]?15 At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [canned–config]?Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): ![OK – 2457/4096 bytes]2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#16 Verify that the Canned Configuration File is saved on the CF Memory Card by entering the dirCommand.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Mar 01 1993 00:11:34 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2457 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24877983 bytes free)BTSRTR1#17 To allow the BTS Router to boot using the Canned Configuration, enter the following command.copy canned–config startup–config– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-31PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep18 When prompted for the Destination File Name, press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?2457 bytes copied in 3.52 secsBTSRTR1#19 Display and note the file size of the startup–config File by entering the following command.dir nvram:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of nvram:/ 26 –rw– 2457 <no date> startup–config 27 –––– 5 <no date> private–config29688 bytes total (24774 bytes free)BTSRTR1#20 Scroll the HyperTerminal Window back to the slot0: Directory Display obtained in Step 16,above.21 Compare the file size of the startup–config File to the Canned Configuration File to verify theCopy Operation.– The file sizes should be the same.22 If desired, the contents of the startup–config File may be verified against the file listings atthe end of this appendix for the blue or red Canned Configuration, as applicable, by entering thefollowing command.show startup–configNOTEPressing the Space Bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another full screen of data.Pressing the Enter Key will scroll the screen one line at a time.23 Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–upConfiguration Files by entering the following command.reload– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]24 If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.25 When prompted to proceed with Reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-32 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServernActionStep26 Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messagesrelated to Port Configurations.SIf the BTS Router boots to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS RouterBoot to ROMMON section of this appendix.27 Using the tagging materials, tag the BTS Router to clearly identify the installed configuration[blue (BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)].28 Remove the CF Memory from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812TLite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60) Manual.29 Mark the installed configuration (blue or red) on the Card Label.30 Install the card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRUmanual (68P09262A60)31 If an additional BTS Router needs have the Canned Configuration installed, perform the followingactions.31a Disconnect the cabling from the BTS Router.31b Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.31c Repeat the procedures in Table I-5, Table I-6, and this table (Table I-7) using the additional BTSRouter.32 If no additional BTS Routers must be configured, perform Steps 31a and 31b, then proceed toStep 33.33 On the LMF Computer, shut down the TFTP Server Application and exit the HyperTerminalSession.34 If no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to be performed, change the NIC IP Address andSubnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are notrestored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization orATP. I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-33PRELIMINARYMethod 2: Using a CF MemoryCard Reader to Load CFMemory CardRequired Equipment and SoftwareThe following items are required to perform this procedure:SA Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMFComputer Platform as specified in this manual.SOne of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File SystemBTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSCompact Flash Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver forthe Operating System installed on the LMF ComputerCard Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memorydevices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with theCF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do notattempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type ofmemory device.CAUTIONSCable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this appendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisappendixSA copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for thenetwork where the BTS Routers are to be installed (Contact theNetwork Administrator and the Motorola Account Team forinformation on obtaining the required MWR 1941 IOS Version.)SA +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router duringConfiguration File Operations.Required MaterialsThe following material is required to perform this method:STagging and marking material to identify the BTS Router and CFMemory Card with the installed configuration (blue or red).I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-34 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRequired PublicationsThe following publications are required to perform procedures in thissection:SCellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine DocumentationSMWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01File Operations Using a CF Memory Card ReaderOnly File Transfers should be performed using the CF Memory CardReader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTSRouter using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CFMemory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Readercould result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation.Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using aWindows–based computer. Only format CF Memory Cardsin a BTS Router.CAUTIONVerifying IOS Version and Loading BTS Router CannedConfiguration File to CF Memory Card Using a CF MemoryCard ReaderThe process of transferring a Canned Configuration File to a BTS Routerusing a CF Memory Card Reader consists of the following activities:1. Transfer the Canned Configuration File to the BTS Router’s CFMemory Card using a CF Memory Card Reader.2. Copy the file from the CF Memory Card to the BTS Router’sstartup–config File.The following procedures are used to accomplish these actions.PrerequisitesThe following is required prior to performing this procedure.:SA copy of the required MWR 1941 Router IOS Version file isinstalled in the Default TFTP Directory (transfer the file to the LMFComputer using FTP, Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk;file size is approximately 7–8 MB).Verifying IOS Version and transferring Canned ConfigurationFile to the BTS Router’s CF Memory CardMWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Versionmwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This Routermodel will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.IMPORTANT*I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-35PRELIMINARYTransfer the Canned Configuration Files from the LMF Computer to aBTS Router CF Memory Card by performing the procedure in Table I-8.Table I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card ReadernStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1If it has not been done, install a CF Memory Card loaded with the IOS in the BTS Router byperforming the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).* IMPORTANTMWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later.This Router model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.2Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router and start a HyperTerminal CommunicationSession with the BTS Router by performing the procedure in Table I-2.3If it has not been done, connect the BTS Router to the +27V DC Power Supply Module.– Make sure that the +27V DC Power Supply Module Output is OFF.* IMPORTANTIn Step 4, do not touch the computer keyboard until the BTS Router completes the Boot Process.The BTS Router buffers any keystrokes made during the Boot Process and interprets them ascommands to be executed immediately following Boot Process completion.4Apply power to the BTS Router and allow it to complete the Boot Process.SIf a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter Key and proceed to Step 5:Press RETURN to get started!5If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter Key:Basic management set–up configures only enough connectivityfor management of the system, extended set–up will ask youto configure each interface on the systemWould you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]: noCisco Internetwork Operating System SoftwareIOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobinRouter>table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-36 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card ReadernActionStep! CAUTIONUse only a Card Reader specifically designed for CF Memory Cards to perform this procedure.Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices such as Smart Media Cards willnot work with the CF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers.6If it has not been done, follow the CF Memory Card Reader manufacturer’s instructions to loadthe CF Memory Card Driver Application for the Operating System being used onto the LMFComputer.7Connect the CF Memory Card Reader to the LMF Computer following the Card Readermanufacturer’s instructions.8Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).9Insert the CF Memory Card into the Card Reader as specified by the Card Reader manufacturer’sinstructions.10 On the LMF Computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.NOTEThe CF Memory Card Reader will appear as a Disk Drive in Windows Explorer with a Disk DriveLetter and Icon.11 Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF Memory Card.12 Verify that the CF Memory Card contains the required version of the IOS by performing thefollowing actions.12a In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF Memory Card Icon.12b In the right–hand pane, note the IOS Filename loaded on the card, and record it.NOTEThe IOS Filename will be similar to mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin.13 Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where theCanned Configuration Files that were downloaded from the OMC–R and where the required IOSVersion are stored.14 In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.15 In the the right–hand pane, locate the filename of the required IOS Version and compare it to thefilename recorded in Step 12b, above.SIf the filenames are different:– Proceed to Table I-11 to replace the IOS on the CF Memory Card.– Then, proceed to Step 16, below.16 In the right–hand pane, highlight the Canned Configuration File to be transferred to the CFMemory Card and drag it to the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-37PRELIMINARYTable I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card ReadernActionStep17 Verify that the Canned Configuration File has been copied to the CF Memory Card by clicking onthe CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon in the left–hand pane.– Verify that the Canned Configuration File appears in the in the right–hand pane.NOTEDo not be concerned if the Canned Configuration File appears before the IOS File in the FileSequence displayed by Windows Explorer.– The position of the IOS File in the sequence of files on the CF Memory Card can not beverified until the CF Memory Card is installed in the BTS Router.18 With the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon still selected, change the name of the CannedConfiguration File on the card to canned–config by performing the following actions.18a In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, click on the Canned Configuration Filename.– The filename will be highlighted.18b Wait approximately two seconds, and then click on the Canned Configuration File Filename again.– A hair–line rectangle will appear around the highlighted filename.18c After the rectangle appears around the highlighted filename, type the following:canned–config18d Press the Enter Key or click on the Canned Configuration File icon.– The rectangle around the Canned Configuration Filename will disappear and the filename willremain highlighted.19 Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.20 Remove the CF Memory Card with the IOS Version and Canned Configuration File from the CardReader, and mark the Card Label with the Canned Configuration (blue or red) copied to it.21 Install the CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812TLite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).22 Proceed to Table I-9 to copy the Canned Configuration from the CF Memory Card to the BTSRouter’s startup–config File. I
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-38 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCopy Canned Configuration File from the CF Memory Card tothe BTS Router’s Start–up Configuration and Verify the IOSFile Sequence To allow the BTS Router to automatically boot using the CannedConfiguration, the configuration must be copied to the the BTS Router’sstartup–config File in NVRAM. Perform the procedure in Table I-9to accomplish this..Table I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up Configuration and Verify IOS File PositionnStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and Programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router Initialization, Operation, ProgrammingInformation, and Procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1If it has not been done, install the CF Memory Card with the Canned Configuration and requiredIOS Version in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRUmanual (68P09262A60).2At this point, the BTS Router should be powered up and displaying the router> Prompt in theHyperTerminal Window of the LMF Computer Communication Session.If it is not, perform Step 1 through Step 5 of Table I-8.3At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXECMode:enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router>enableRouter#NOTEThe IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present Working Directoryhas been changed by using the cd Command.Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.– If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to returnto the default setting.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-39PRELIMINARYTable I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up Configuration and Verify IOS File PositionnActionStep4Display the Directory Listing of the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.dir– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dir slot0:Directory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#5Ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.SIf it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-12, and then return to Step 6, below.6Copy the Canned Configuration to the BTS Router’s Start–up Configuration File by entering thefollowing command.copy slot0:canned–config startup–config– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#copy slot0:canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?7When prompted for the Destination File Name, press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#copy slot0:canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?2218 bytes copied in 3.52 secsRouter1#8Check the file size of the startup–config File to verify the copy operation by entering thefollowing command.dir nvram:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of nvram:/ 26 –rw– 2218 <no date> startup–config 27 –––– 5 <no date> private–config29688 bytes total (25247 bytes free)Router#* IMPORTANTBe sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continued I-40 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up Configuration and Verify IOS File PositionnActionStep9If desired, the contents of the startup–config File may be verified against the file listings atthe end of this appendix for the blue or red Canned Configuration, as applicable, by entering thefollowing command.show startup–configNOTEPressing the Space Bar at the MORE Prompt will scroll to another full screen of data.Pressing the Enter Key will scroll the screen one line at a time.10 Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–up Configuration Filesby entering the following command.reload– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]11 If prompted to save a modified configuration:– Enter n for “no”.– Press the Enter Key.12 When prompted to proceed with reload:– Press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.13 Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messagesrelated to Port Configurations.SIf the BTS Router does boot to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTSRouter Boot to ROMMON section of this appendix.SIf the BTS Router does not boot to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to Step 14.14 Using the tagging materials, tag the BTS Router to clearly identify the installed configuration[blue (BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)].15 Determine if additional BTS Routers need to be configured.SIf no additional BTS Routers need to be configured, perform Step 16, Step 17, and Step 19 only.–Do not perform Step 18.SIf any additional BTS Router need to be configured, perform Step 16, Step 17, Step 18, andStep 19.16 Disconnect the cabling for the HyperTerminal Communications Session from the BTS Router, andminimize the HyperTerminal Window on the LMF Computer.17 Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.table continued on next pageI
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-41PRELIMINARYTable I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up Configuration and Verify IOS File PositionnActionStep18 Repeat the procedures in Table I-8 and this table (Table I-9) using the additional BTS Router.19 On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Session. I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version I-42 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBackgroundBTS Routers are supplied with CF Memory Cards pre–loaded with aversion of the IOS. Prior to installing the BTS Routers in a BTS, theloaded IOS Version should be verified as being the one required for thenetwork.It is critical to also verify that the IOS File is the first file on the CFMemory Card. If another file precedes the IOS File, the BTS Router willnot boot properly and will not function in the network.Equipment and SoftwareRequired for VerificationMethodsThe following items are required to perform this procedure:SA Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMFComputer Platform as specified in Chapter 3 of this manual:SOne of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File SystemBTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSCable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this appendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisappendixSA copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for thenetwork where the BTS Routers are to be installed.Contact the Network Administrator or the MotorolaAccount Team for assistance in determining and obtaininga copy of the required IOS Version.NOTESThe MWR 1941 will accept a voltage from –60V DC to + 60V DCduring Configuration and File Operations.Required PublicationsThe following publication is required to perform procedures in thissection:SMWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-43PRELIMINARYMethod 1: Replacement ofInstalled Router CF Card IOSDataDescriptionThis procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a TFTPServer Application to perform the following activities::1. Verify that the IOS Version is loaded on a CF Memory Card andrunning on a BTS Router.2. Replace the IOS Version installed in a BTS Router.3. Ensure the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory CardAdditional Required Equipment/SoftwareFor this method, the following Software Application is required inaddition to the common items required for both methods.:SCable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)SA TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up theTFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation such as:– Cisco TFTP Server– PumpKIN TFTP Server– Any other equivalent TFTP Server ApplicationPrerequisitesThe following are required prior to performing this procedure::SThe LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for TFTPFile Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing theprocedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and Steps 1 through 10of Table I-7.SA copy of the required IOS Version is loaded into the TFTP DefaultDirectory of the LMF ComputerReplacing Installed IOS Version and Verifying File SequencePositionPerform the procedure in Table I-10 to replace the installed IOS Versionusing the TFTP Server Application, and ensure the IOS File is first inthe stored File Sequence on the CF Memory Card..I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-44 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, andoperating as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, andSteps 1 through 10 of Table I-7.– If necessary, perform these procedures now.NOTEThe present IOS Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless thepresent Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.2Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.SIf the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return tothe default setting.3Identify the filename of the currently loaded IOS that must be replaced by entering dir command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051844 Sep 23 2002 07:15:08 mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:11:00 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24878360 bytes free)BTSRTR1#4Begin to back–up the currently installed version of the BTS Router’s IOS to the LMF Computer’sDefault TFTP Directory by entering the following command.copy old_IOS_filename TFTP:– Where old_IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS currently loaded on the BTS Router CFMemory Card.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin TFTP:Address or name of remote host []?table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-45PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep5At the Remote Host Prompt, enter the following:100.100.100.1– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?6If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!7051844 bytes copied in 109.92 secs (64697 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#7If additional files are stored on the CF Memory Card, begin backing them up to the LMFComputer’s Default TFTP Directory by entering the following command.copy additional_filename TFTP:– Where additional_filename = the filename of an additional file loaded on the BTS RouterCF Memory Card.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config TFTP:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?8If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [canned–config]?table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-46 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep9If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Source filename [canned–config]? Destination filename [canned–config]?10 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Destination filename [canned–config]?![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#11 If more files are stored on the CF Memory Card, repeat Steps 7 through 10 until all files have beenbacked up to the LMF Computer.12 Delete all files from the CF Memory Card by entering the following command:format slot0:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#format slot0:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]13 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-47PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep14 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...Writing Monlibsectors....................................................................................Monlib write complete.Format: All system sectors written. OK...Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720Format: Operation completed successfully.Format of slot0 completeBTSRTR1#15 Verify that all files have been deleted from the CF Memory Card by entering the dir Command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of slot0:/No files in directory31932416 bytes total (31932416 bytes free)BTSRTR1#16 Begin to copy the required version of the IOS from the LMF Computer to the BTS Router byentering the following command.copy TFTP:new_IOS_filename slot0:– Where new_IOS_filename = the filename of the required IOS for the BTS Router.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?17 If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?table continued on next page I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-48 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep18 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]? Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?19 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]? Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#20 Display the CF Memory Card Directory to verify that the new IOS File is there by entering the dircommand.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:25:36 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24880440 bytes free)BTSRTR1#table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-49PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep21 If any additional files previously stored on the CF Memory Card are to be copied to the card, enterthe following command.copy TFTP:filename slot0:– Where filename = the filename of the file to be copied to the CF Memory Card– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:canned–config slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?22 If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default IP Address is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Destination filename [canned–config]?23 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Destination filename [canned–config]? Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/canned–config...Loading basic_config from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): ![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#24 After the additional file is copied to the CF Memory Card, display the CF Memory Card Directoryby entering the dir Command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:09:06 canned–config25 The IOS File must be the first file listed for the BTS Router to boot properly.SIf it is, proceed to Step 30.SIf it is not, proceed to Step 26.table continued on next page I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-50 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep! CAUTIONThe File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with application programs thatplace the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,that do not list directory contents alphabetically.26 If another file is listed before the IOS File, delete the file by performing Step 12 through Step 14and display the directory of the CF Memory Card as described in Step 24 to ensure that the file isdeleted.27 Copy the file from the LMF Computer to the CF Memory Card again by performing Step 21through Step 24.28 If the file is again listed before the IOS File in the CF Memory Card Directory Display, format theCF Memory Card by performing Step 12 through Step 15 of this table.29 Copy the IOS File and any other required file to the formatted CF Memory Card by performingStep 16 through Step 25.30 If additional files are to be transferred to the CF Memory Card, perform Step 21 through Step 25for each file.31 After making sure that the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory Card, restart the BTSRouter with the new IOS Version by entering the following command.reload– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]32 If prompted to save a modified configuration:– Enter n for “no”. – Press the Enter Key.33 When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-51PRELIMINARYTable I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep34 Once the BTS Router has completed rebooting, change to the Privileged EXEC Mode and confirmthat the booted IOS Version is correct by entering the following command.show version– A response similar to the following partial example will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RE-LEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)...BTSRTR1#35 Verify that the Version Number displayed in the second line of the Version Information is thecorrect IOS Version.36 If this procedure was entered from Step 10 of Table I-7, return to Table I-7, Step 11.37 If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform thefollowing actions.37a Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.37b Disconnect all other cabling from the BTS Router.37c On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.38 If no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to be performed, change the NIC IP Address andSubnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are notrestored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization orATP. Method 2: Using a CF MemoryCard Reader for Replacementof Installed IOS Version andChanging File SequencePositionThis subsection contains the File Replacement and File SequenceManipulation Procedures to use when transferring files with a CFMemory Card Reader.Replace IOS Version Installed on the CF Memory CardDescription – This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equippedwith a CF Memory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-52 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARY1. Verify that the IOS Version is loaded on a CF Memory Card andrunning on a BTS Router.2. Replace the IOS Version installed in a BTS Router.3. Ensure that the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory Card.Additional Required Equipment/Software – For this method, thefollowing equipment item and associated software is required in additionto the common items required for both methods.:SCompact Flash Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver forthe Operating System are installed on the LMF Computer.Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memorydevices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with theCF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do notattempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type ofmemory device.CAUTIONPrerequisites – The following items are required prior to performingthis procedure.:SThe LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CFMemory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would beafter performing the procedures in Steps 1 through 10 of Table I-8.SA copy of the required IOS Version is loaded into the desired directoryof the LMF Computer.File Operations using a CF Memory Card Reader – Only FileTransfers should be performed using the CF Memory Card Reader. CFMemory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTS Router using aHyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CF Memory Cardfrom a Windows–based computer using a Card Reader could result inunpredictable BTS Router Operation.Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using aWindows–based computer.– Only format CF Memory Cards in a BTS Router.CAUTIONReplacing installed IOS Version – Perform the procedure in Table I-11to replace the installed IOS Version using a CF Memory Card Readerand to ensure the IOS File is first in the stored File Sequence on the CFMemory Card.I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-53PRELIMINARYTable I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, andoperating as they would be after performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 15 of Table I-8.– If necessary, perform these procedures now.2With the CF Memory Card in the CF Memory Card Reader and the Card Reader Icon highlightedin the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform the following actions to delete the IOS Filefrom the card:2a In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, highlight the IOS File to be removed.2b Right–click and select Delete from the Pop–up Menu.! CAUTIONWhen performing Step 3 and its associated Substeps, files should be moved to and from the CFMemory Card one by one to reduce the potential for disrupting the the CF Memory Card FileSequence.Do not attempt to move multiple files by highlighting, dragging, and dropping all of them at onetime.3If there are more files on the CF Memory Card that must be retained, perform the followingactions.3a Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF Computer Directory where therequired IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files are stored.3b In the right–hand pane, highlight the additional file on the CF Memory Card that is to be retained.3c While holding down the Ctrl Key on the LMF Computer, drag and drop the highlighted file intothe directory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS and canned config files are stored.3d If additional files loaded on the CF Memory Card must be retained, repeat Step 3b and Step 3c foreach file until all files have been moved from the CF Memory Card to the directory on the LMFComputer.4When all files on the CF Memory Card have been deleted or moved, as applicable, highlight thedirectory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Filesare stored.5Verify that all files from the CF Memory Card that must be retained were moved to the directoryby checking the filenames in the right–hand pane.6Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the CF Memory Card Reader Icon.table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-54 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep7In the right–hand pane, highlight the icon for the required version of the IOS.8Drag and drop the IOS Icon to the CF Memory Card Reader Icon to copy it to the CF MemoryCard.9If an additional file in the LMF Computer Directory must be moved to the CF Memory Card,perform the following:9a In the right–hand pane, highlight one additional file that is to be moved to the CF Memory Card.9b While holding down the Ctrl Key on the LMF Computer, drag and drop the highlighted file intothe CF Memory Card Reader directory in the left–hand pane.9c If additional files in the directory must be placed on the CF Memory Card, repeat Step 9a andStep 9b for each file until all files have been moved one at a time from the LMF Computer to theCF Memory Card.10 In the left–hand pane, highlight the CF Memory Card Reader Icon.11 Verify that all required files were moved to the CF Memory Card by checking the filenames in theright–hand pane.12 Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF Computer Directory where therequired IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files are stored.13 Highlight the directory in the left–hand pane.14 If this procedure was entered from Step 15 of Table I-8, return to Table I-8, Step 16.15 If no other File Transfer Activities between the LMF Computer and CF Memory Card are requiredat this time, click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.16 Remove the CF Memory Card from the Card Reader and install it in the BTS Router byperforming the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).17 At this point, the BTS Router should be powered up and displaying the User EXEC Prompt in theHyperTerminal Window of the LMF Computer Communication Session.SIf it is not, perform Step 1 through Step 5 of Table I-8.18 At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following command to access the PrivilegedEXEC Mode.enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router>enableRouter#table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-55PRELIMINARYTable I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStepNOTEThe current IOS Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless thepresent Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.SIf the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the cd slot0: Command to returnto the default setting.19 Display the Directory Listing of the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.dir– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dir slot0:Directory of slot0:/1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#! CAUTIONThe File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs thatplace the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,that do not list directory contents alphabetically.20 Ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.SIf it is, proceed to Step 21.SIf it is not,– Perform the procedure in Table I-12.– Then, return to Step 21, below.21 Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–up Configuration Filesby entering the following command.reload– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]22 If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.23 When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-56 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionnActionStep24 Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messagesrelated to Port Configurations.25 If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform thefollowing actions.25a Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.25b Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.25c On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session. Change CF Memory Card FileSequence to Place IOS FileFirst on the CardThis procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a CFMemory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:1. Change the sequence of files on a CF Memory Card to place the IOSVersion file first.2. Formatting the CF Memory Card, if necessary, to achieve therequired File Sequence Positioning of the IOS Version File.PrerequisitesThe following are required prior to performing this procedure.:SThe LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CFMemory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would beafter performing the procedures in Table I-8 and Step 1 through Step 5of Table I-9.SCopies of the required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Filesare loaded into the desired directory of the LMF Computer.Optional equipment/softwareIf they are available, the following items may be used to change the CFMemory Card File Sequence once the card is installed in the BTSRouter.:SCable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-57PRELIMINARY– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)SA TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up theTFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation) such as:– Cisco TFTP Server– PumpKIN TFTP Server– Any other equivalent TFTP Server ApplicationChanging CF Memory Card File SequencePerform the procedure in Table I-12 to place the installed IOS Versionfile first in the stored File Sequence on the CF Memory Card..Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenStep Action! CAUTIONThe File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs thatplace the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).This procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, that do not listdirectory contents alphabetically.1This procedure assumes that the LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CFMemory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing theprocedures in Table I-8 and Steps 1 through 5 of Table I-9.– If necessary, perform these procedures now.NOTEThe IOS present Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless thepresent Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd. If the present Working Directory hasbeen changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default setting.2With the CF Memory Card still installed in the BTS Router, display a CF Memory Card DirectoryListing if one is not showing by entering the dir command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dir slot0:Directory of slot0:/2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)Router#3Verify that the IOS File is not the first file on the CF Memory Card.table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-58 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep4Check if a TFTP Server Application is available on the LMF Computer.SIf a TFTP Server Application is not available, skip to Step 22.SIf a TFTP Server Application is available, connect the Ethernet Crossover Cable as shown inFigure I-4.5If it has not been done, configure the LMF Computer NIC as directed in Table I-4.6Configure FE Port FE 0 (fa0/0) by performing the following actions.6a At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXECMode:enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router>enableRouter#6b At the Router# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the ConfigureSubmode:configure terminal– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.Router(config)#table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-59PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep6c At the Global Configuration Mode Prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing theEnter Key after each command:hostname btsrtr1interface fa0/0ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252speed 100duplex fullno shutdownline con 0exec–timeout 0 0no Loginline vty 0 4no Login– Responses similar to the following will be displayed:Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex fullBTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdownBTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#no LoginBTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4BTSRTR1(config–line)#no LoginBTSRTR1(config–line)#6d Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt byholding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consoleBTSRTR1#6e Verify Port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP Address by entering the followingcommand.show ip interface brief– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh ip int brInterface IP Address OK? Method Status ProtocolFastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES manual up upSerial0:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downFastEthernet0/1 unassigned YES unset administratively down downSerial1:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downBTSRTR1#table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-60 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep7Ensure that the required IOS File and Canned Configuration File for the BTS Router are located inthe TFTP Server Root Directory.– Refer to Table I-4, Step 14 or Step 17, as applicable.8Delete files from the CF Memory Card by entering the del filename command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:–Router#del canned–configDelete filename [canned–config]?9If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Delete filename [canned–config]? Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]10 Press the Enter Key to confirm the deletion.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Delete filename [canned–config]? Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]Router#11 Confirm the file deletion by entering the dir command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24887818 bytes free)Router#12 Repeat Step 8 through Step 11 for each file until all files have been deleted from the CF MemoryCard.13 Use the TFTP Server to copy the IOS File from the LMF Computer to the CF Memory Card byentering the following command.copy TFTP:IOS_filename slot0:– Where IOS_filename = required IOS Version filename in the LMF Computer TFTP ServerRoot Directory.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host []?table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-61PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep14 At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF ComputerNIC:100.100.100.1– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?15 At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)16 Display the directory of the CF Memory Card to confirm the IOS File Transfer by entering the dirCommand.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (248880440 bytes free)Router#table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-62 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep17 Copy the Canned Configuration File to the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config– Where color = blue or red, as applicable.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?18 If the Default IP Address for the LMF Computer displayed in the prompt is correct, press theEnter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is accepted:Destination filename [canned–config]? 2212 bytes copied in 0.208 secsRouter#19 At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [canned–config]?Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): ![OK – 2457/4096 bytes]2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#20 Determine if the IOS File is now the first file displayed in the Directory Listing by entering thedir Command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)Router#21 Identify if the IOS File is the first file displayed, as shown in Step 20, above.SIf it is the the first file displayed, proceed to Step 29.SIf it is not the the first file displayed, proceed to Step 22.table continued on next pageI
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-63PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep22 Format the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.format slot0:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#format slot0:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]23 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]24 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...Writing Monlibsectors....................................................................................Monlib write complete.Format: All system sectors written. OK...Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720Format: Operation completed successfully.Format of slot0 completeBTSRTR1#25 If a TFTP Server is available on the LMF Computer, repeat Steps 13 through 21 to transfer theIOS and Canned Configuration Files to the CF Memory Card.26 Once the Format Operation is completed, perform the following actions.26a Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).26b Insert the CF Memory Card in the Card Reader connected to the LMF Computer.26c Copy the IOS File to the card by performing Step 4, and Step 6 through Step 11 of Table I-11, asrequired.27 Remove the CF Memory Card from the Card Reader and install it in the BTS Router byperforming the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).table continued on next page I
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version – continued I-64 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File First in CF Memory Card File SequencenActionStep28 Verify that the IOS File is now the first file displayed in the Directory Listing by entering the dirCommand.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#29 If this procedure was entered from Step 5 of Table I-9, return to Table I-9, Step 6.30 If this procedure was entered from Step 20 of Table I-11, return to Table I-11, Step 21.31 If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform thefollowing actions.31a Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.31b Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.31c On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.32 If a TFTP Server was used in this procedure and no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to beperformed, change the NIC IP Address and Subnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTSCommunication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are notrestored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization orATP. I
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON VersionFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-65PRELIMINARYIntroductionBTS Routers are supplied pre–loaded with a version of the ROMMonitor (ROMMON) Low–level Operating System. Along with the IOSVersion, the loaded ROMMON Version should be verified as being theone required for the network.Procedures in this section are used to verify the loaded ROMMONVersion, and, if necessary, change it to the required version. Methods areprovided for using either a TFTP Server or CF Memory Card Reader totransfer the required ROMMON Version to a BTS Router’s CF MemoryCard.Equipment and SoftwareRequired for VerificationThe following items are required to perform ROMMON Verification:SA Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMFComputer Platform as specified in this manual: 1X SC4812T Lite BTSOptimization/ATP manual (68P09262A58).SOne of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File SystemBTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSCable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this appendix.SDB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisappendix.SA copy of the MWR 1941 Router ROMMON Version required for thenetwork where the BTS Routers are to be installed.Contact the Network Administrator or the MotorolaAccount Team for assistance in determining and obtaininga copy of the required ROMMON Version.NOTESA +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router duringConfiguration File Operations.I
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-66 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYRequired PublicationsThe following publication is required to perform procedures in thissection:SMWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01Method 1: In–RouterVerification and Replacementof Installed ROMMON VersionDescriptionThis procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a TFTPServer Application to perform the following activities.:1. Verify that the ROMMON Version loaded and running on a BTSRouter2. Replace the ROMMON Version installed in a BTS RouterAdditional Required Equipment/SoftwareFor this method, the following equipment and Software Application isrequired in addition to the common items required for both methods.:SCable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)SA TFTP Server Software Application; refer to the Setting Up theTFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation such as:– Cisco TFTP Server– PumpKIN TFTP Server– Any other equivalent TFTP Server ApplicationPrerequisitesThe following items are required prior to performing this procedure.:SThe LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for TFTPFile Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing theprocedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and Steps 1 through 10of Table I-7.SA copy of the required ROMMON Version is loaded into the TFTPDefault Directory of the LMF Computer.Verifying and replacing installed ROMMON VersionPerform the procedure in Table I-13 to verify and, if necessary, replacethe installed ROMMON Version using the TFTP Server Application..I
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-67PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, andoperating as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, andSteps 1 through 4 of Table I-7.– If necessary, perform these procedures now.2Identify the installed ROMMON Version from the BTS Router Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt:show version– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RE-LEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOP-MENT SOFTWAREROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASESOFTWARE (fc3)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes ofmemory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-68 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernActionStep3To identify the currently installed ROMMON Version, examine the ROM: system bootstrapLine in the response.4Compare the installed ROMMON Version information with the Filename of the ROMMONVersion required for the network.NOTE1. The ROMMON Filename Format is similar to the following:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin2. The ROMMON Filename reflects the Version Number of the software (122–8r.MC3).5If the installed version is the one required for the network, skip to Step 26.6If the installed ROMMON Version is not the one required for the network, back–up the currentBTS Router Configuration to the LMF Computer by entering the following command.copy nvram:startup–config TFTP– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy nvram:start TFTPAddress or name of remote host []?NOTEEnsure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.7At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF ComputerNIC:100.100.100.1– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy copy nvram:start TFTPAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Source filename [startup–config]?8If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Source filename [startup–config]? Destination filename [startup–config]?table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-69PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernActionStep9If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Destination filename [startup–config]?![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#NOTEThe IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present Working Directoryhas been changed by using the cd Command.– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.– If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to returnto the default setting.10 Determine the amount of memory available (bytes free) on the CF Memory Card by entering thedir command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#11 Verify that there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.NOTEA ROMMON Version File requires approximately 0.7 MB.12 Begin to copy the required version of the ROMMON File from the LMF Computer to the BTSRouter by entering the following command.copy TFTP:new_rommon_filename slot0:– Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMMON Version for theBTS Router.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-70 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernActionStep13 If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?14 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?15 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin...Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):!!!!Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK – 614306/14103552 bytes]614306 bytes copied in 13.059 secs (48634 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#16 Display the CF Memory Card Directory to verify that the new ROMMON Version File is there byentering the dir Command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:25:36 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:09:06 canned–config 3 –rw– 614306 Dec 13 2002 14:59:36 MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin31932416 bytes total (24263922 bytes free)BTSRTR1#17 Replace the existing ROMMON Version with the new one copied to the CF Memory Card byentering the following command.upgrade rom–monitor file slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#This command will reload the BTS Router. Continue?[yes/no]table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-71PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernActionStep18 When prompted to continue, enter yes and press the Enter Key.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#This command will reload the BTS Router. Continue?[yes/no] yesROMMON image upgrade in progressErasing boot flasheeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeProgramming boot flash ppppNow reloading19 When the BTS Router has completed Initialization, change to the BTS Router Privileged EXECMode by entering the following command.enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1>enableBTSRTR1#20 Verify that the BTS Router has initialized with the new ROMMON Version by entering thefollowing command.show version– A response similar to the following partial response will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RE-LEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(8r)MC3 RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)21 Compare the version displayed in the response ROM: System Bootstrap Line to the filename ofthe new ROMMON Version File copied to the CF Memory Card.22 If the BTS Router successfully rebooted with the new ROMMON Version, the ROMMON Filecan be deleted from the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.delete slot0:new_rommon_filename– Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMMON Version copied tothe CF Memory Card in Steps 12 through 15, above.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#del slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.binDelete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-72 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP ServernActionStep23 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]24 Press the Enter Key to confirm the deletion.– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]BTSRTR1#! CAUTIONIn Step 25, do not delete the IOS and canned–config files from the CF Memory Card.– The BTS Router must have these files on the card to properly boot or switch between Packetand Circuit Mode.25 If additional unnecessary files, such as a back–up of the startup–config File, are also on theCF Memory Card, delete them by repeating Step 22 through Step 24 for each file.26 If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform thefollowing actions.26a Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.26b Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.26c On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.27 If no additional TFTP Transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP Address andSubnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are notrestored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization orATP. Method 2: Verification andReplacement of InstalledROMMON Version Using a CFMemory Card ReaderDescriptionThis procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a CFMemory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:1. Verify the ROMMON Version loaded and running on a BTS Router.2. Replace the ROMMON Version installed in a BTS Router.I
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-73PRELIMINARYAdditional Required Equipment/SoftwareFor this method, the following equipment item and associated softwareis required in addition to the common items required for both methods.:SCF Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver for theOperating System installed on the LMF Computer.Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memorydevices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with theCF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do notattempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type ofmemory device.CAUTIONPrerequisitesThe following items are required prior to performing this procedure.:SThe LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CFMemory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would beafter performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 10 of Table I-8.SA copy of the required ROMMON Version is loaded into the desireddirectory of the LMF Computer.File Operations using a CF Memory Card ReaderOnly File Transfers should be performed using the CF Memory CardReader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTSRouter using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CFMemory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Readercould result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation..Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using aWindows–based computer. Only format CF Memory Cardsin a BTS Router.CAUTIONVerifying and replacing installed ROMMON VersionPerform the procedure in Table I-14 to verify and, if necessary replacethe installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader.. I
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-74 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card ReadernStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, andoperating as they would be after performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 10 of Table I-8.– If necessary, perform these procedures now.2Determine the currently installed ROMMON Version by entering the following at the BTS RouterPrivileged EXEC Mode Prompt:show version– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RE-LEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOP-MENT SOFTWAREROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASESOFTWARE (fc3)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes ofmemory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-75PRELIMINARYTable I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card ReadernActionStep3To determine the currently installed ROMMON Version, examine the ROM: System BootstrapLine in the response.4Compare the installed ROMMON Version Information with the Filename of the ROMMONVersion required for the network.NOTE1. The ROMMON Filename Format is similar to the following:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin2. The ROMMON Filename reflects the Version Number of the software (122–8r.MC3).5If the installed version is the one required for the network, skip to Step 26.6NOTEThe IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) directory unless the present Working Directoryhas been changed by using the cd Command.– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.SIf the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return tothe default setting.7If the installed ROMMON Version is not the one required for the network, determine the amountof memory available (bytes free) on the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.dir– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18 mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#8Ensure that there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.NOTEA ROMMON Version File requires approximately 0.7 MB, and space must also be available for aback–up of the BTS Router’s startup–config File.9Create a back–up of the current BTS Router Configuration on the CF Memory Card by enteringthe following command.copy nvram:startup–config slot:0– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy nvram:startup–config slot0:Destination filename [startup–config]?table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continued I-76 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card ReadernActionStep10 If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.SIf it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:Destination filename [startup–config]? 2212 bytes copied in 4.96 secs (553 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#11 Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).12 Insert the CF Memory Card into the Card Reader as specified by the Card Reader manufacturer’sinstructions.13 On the LMF Computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.NOTEThe CF Memory Card Reader will appear as a Disk Drive in Windows Explorer with a Disk Driveletter and icon.14 Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF Memory Card.15 In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF Memory Card Icon.16 In the right–hand pane, verify that the files displayed in Step 6, above, appear.17 Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where therequired ROMMON Version File is stored.18 In the right–hand pane, perform the following actions.18a Highlight the startup–config File on the CF Memory Card.NOTEAfter highlighting the startup–config File in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary to scrollthe left–hand pane to see the Directory Icon where the required ROMMON Version File is storedbefore dragging the file.18b Note its file size.18c Drag it to the icon for the directory where the required ROMMON Version File is stored.19 In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the required ROMMON Version File is stored.20 In the right–hand pane, verify that the startup–config File is in the directory, and the file sizeis the same as the original on the CF Memory Card.table continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-77PRELIMINARYTable I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card ReadernActionStep21 In the right–hand pane, highlight the required ROMMON Version File to be transferred to the CFMemory Card and drag it to the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon.NOTEAfter highlighting the ROMMON Version File in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary toscroll the left–hand pane to see the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon before dragging the file.22 Verify that the ROMMON Version File has been copied to the CF Memory Card by clicking onthe CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon in the left–hand pane, and being sure that the ROMMONVersion File appears in the in the right–hand pane.23 Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.24 Remove the CF Memory Card with the ROMMON Version File from the Card Reader.25 Install the CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812TLite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).26 Proceed to Replace Installed ROMMON Version, below. I
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON I-78 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYIntroductionROM Monitor Boot ConditionsUnder certain circumstances the BTS Router will initialize with theROM Monitor (ROMMON) Operating System rather than the IOS.These circumstances include:SIOS File is missing from the CF Memory CardSIOS File is not the first file on the CF Memory CardSIOS File image on the CF Memory Card is corruptSStart–up–config File contains an outdated Boot System Linespecifying an IOS File that has been replaced with an updated versionSStart–up–config file contains Boot System Line with typographicalerror(s) in the IOS FilenameDescriptionRouter Operation on ROMMON is signalled by the display of therommon # > Prompt, where # is a number that increments each time acommand is issued. ROMMON is a low–level Operating System thatprovides limited capabilities for Router testing and troubleshootingoperations, but does not support any operations on files beyond viewingdirectory contents or booting from a specified file. As a result, files cannot be copied or deleted when the BTS Router is operating onROMMON.Recovery MethodsTwo recovery methods are included in this section. 1. The first is the simplest and requires that a valid, uncorrupted IOSVersion is installed on the CF Memory Card. 2. The second method requires additional equipment and must be usedin instances such as when an IOS File is not installed on the CFMemory Card or the installed IOS Image is corrupted..Simple Recovery from Boot toROMMONRequirementsUnless it is certain, that the IOS Image on the CF Memory Card iscorrupted, this method should always be the first attempted to recoverthe BTS Router from a ROMMON Initialization. – This method does not require any additional equipment beyond theitems necessary to load Canned Configuration Files into the BTSRouter. – To be effective, this method does require that a valid, uncorruptedIOS Image file is installed on the BTS Router’s CF Memory Card..I
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-79PRELIMINARYRecoveryPerform the procedure in Table I-15 to attempt a simple recovery from aBTS Router ROMMON Initialization..Table I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF Computer is set–up and connected to the BTS Router with anactive HyperTerminal Communication Session.– If it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal CommunicationSession.2With the rommon 1 > Prompt displayed in the HyperTerminal Window, enter the followingcommand to identify the IOS File on the CF Memory Card:dir slot0:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 1 > dir slot0:program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0Directory of slot0:2 2212 –rw– canned–config3 7051976 –rw– mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.binrommon 2 >table continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continued I-80 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep3Note the IOS Filename, and enter the following command to begin recovery to an IOS Boot:boot slot0:IOS_filename– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 2, above.– A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response that begins and endssimilar to the following:rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.binprogram load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99acSelf decompressing the image :################################################################### [OK]Smart Init is enabledsmart init is sizing iomem ID MEMORY_REQ TYPE00031A 0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard 0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools 0X00211000 public particle poolsTOTAL: 0X008F87B0...Press RETURN to get started!SIf the BTS Router successfully reboots with the IOS, proceed to Step 7.SIf the BTS Router does not reboot with the IOS, proceed to Step 44Scroll the HyperTerminal Display down until the Directory Display from Step 2, above, is visible.5Compare the IOS Filename from the Directory Display with the filename entered in performingStep 3, above.SIf the filename was typed incorrectly, repeat Step 3, using care to type the filename correctly.6If the BTS Router does not reboot with the IOS after typing the filename correctly, proceed toTable I-16 and perform the Extended Recovery Procedure.table continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-81PRELIMINARYTable I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep! CAUTIONThe File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs thatplace the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,that do not list directory contents alphabetically.7After a successful reboot with IOS, perform the following actions to correct the cause of the bootto ROMMON:7a Enter the dir slot0: Command to display the CF Memory Card Directory, and, if the IOS File isnot the first file listed, perform the procedure in Table I-10, Steps 26 through 33, or Table I-12, asapplicable, to correct the situation.7b If the IOS File is the first file, enter the following Command to display the contents of thestartup–config File:show startup–configA response that begins similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh startUsing 1589 out of 57336 bytes!version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.07132002.binno logging console!username cisco password 0 cisco!Redundancy mode y–cable standalone!7c If the file listing contains a “Boot System” Line, examine it for the correct IOS Filename.7d If the Boot System slot0: Filename is incorrect, enter the following, using care to type thefilename correctly:boot system slot0:IOS_filename– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 2, above.7e Replace the Boot System Line in the startup–config File with the line entered in Step 7d,above, by entering the following command.copy runing–config startup–configtable continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continued I-82 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep7f Verify that the correct IOS Filename is now included in the listing by entering the followingcommand.show startup–config– A response that begins similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh startUsing 1589 out of 57336 bytes!version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.binno logging console!username cisco password 0 cisco!Redundancy mode y–cable standalone!7g If the filename is correctly written, enter the following to determine if the BTS Router will rebootto IOS:reload– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]8If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.9When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.10 After a successful reboot with IOS, proceed with other BTS Router activities or remove powerfrom the BTS Router and disconnect it.11 If the BTS Router still will not successfully boot with IOS, proceed to Table I-16 and perform theExtended Recovery Procedure. I
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-83PRELIMINARYExtended Recovery from Bootto ROMMONRequirementsIf ROMMON Boot Recovery Attempts fail using the simple recoverymethod, this method must be used to reboot a BTS Router that hasinitialized with ROMMON. This method requires additional equipmentbeyond the items necessary to load Canned Configuration Files into theBTS Router. Extended recovery requires formatting the CF MemoryCard from the ROMMON–initialized Router and reloading thereformatted CF Memory Card with the required IOS Version..Additional Equipment RequiredAn additional, formatted, 32 MB CF Memory Card with the requiredversion of the IOS installed is required in addition to the equipment andsoftware required for BTS Router Canned Configuration Installation.This Card may be::SA spare CF Memory Card that is loaded with the required IOSVersion.SA CF Memory Card from an additional BTS Router that is loadedwith the required IOS Version.RecoveryPerform the procedure in Table I-15 to perform an Extended Recoveryfrom a BTS Router ROMMON Initialization..Table I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnStep Action1This procedure assumes the BTS Router is powered and operating on ROMMON with the LMFComputer Set–up and connected to the BTS Router with an active HyperTerminal CommunicationSession.SIf it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal CommunicationSession.2Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).3Install the additional CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).table continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continued I-84 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep4Enter the following to obtain the filename of the IOS Version loaded on the CF Memory Card:dir slot0:– A response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 1 > dir slot0:program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0Directory of slot0:1 7051976 –rw– mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.binrommon 2 >5Note the exact filename displayed for the IOS Version.table continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-85PRELIMINARYTable I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep6Enter the following command to initialize the BTS Router with the IOS on the additional CFMemory Card.boot slot0:IOS_filename– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 5, above.– A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response that begins and endssimilar to the following:rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.binprogram load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99acSelf decompressing the image :################################################################### [OK]Smart Init is enabledsmart init is sizing iomem ID MEMORY_REQ TYPE00031A 0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard 0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools 0X00211000 public particle poolsTOTAL: 0X008F87B0... ––– System Configuration Dialog –––Would you like to enter the Initial Configuration dialog? [yes/no]: nSIf the BTS Router Prompts with a question to enter the initial dialog as shown in Step 6, above,type no and press the Enter Key to obtain the User EXEC Mode Prompt.SIf the BTS Router Prompts with Press RETURN to get started!, press the Enter Key toobtain the User EXEC Mode Prompt.7At the User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXEC Mode:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:Router> enableRouter#table continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON – continued I-86 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON BootnActionStep8Remove the additional CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).9Install the original CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1XSC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).10 Format the original CF Memory Card by entering the following command.format slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#format slot0:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]11 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation. A response similar to the following willbe displayed:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]12 Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation. A response similar to the following willbe displayed:Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...Writing Monlibsectors....................................................................................Monlib write complete.Format: All system sectors written. OK...Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720Format: Operation completed successfully.Format of slot0 completeRouter#13 Copy the required IOS Version to the formatted original CF Memory Card by performing one ofthe following:SUse the LMF Computer and a TFTP Server performing the procedure in Table I-10SUse the LMF Computer and a CF Memory Card Reader performing the procedure in Table I-1114 If applicable, perform IOS initialization troubleshooting as described in Table I-15, Steps 7through 10. I
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP AddressFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-87PRELIMINARYEntering or Changing RouterFE Interface IP AddressIt may be necessary to enter or change the IP Addresses and/or operatingparameters for BTS Router FE Interfaces FE 0 and FE1 without makingother changes in the BTS Router Configuration Files. Procedures in thissection cover these operations.PrerequisitesThe following must be accomplished before entering or changing BTSRouter FE port IP Addresses and/or operating parameters:SThe user has read and understands the content of MWR1941 WirelessMobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number78–13983–01.SBTS Routers must have the required version of the IOS saved on theirinstalled CF Memory Card.SBTS Routers must have power applied, be operating without alarmsother than Span Alarms, and have completed Boot–up to the UserEXEC Mode Prompt (BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>).SThe BTS Router Privileged EXEC Mode Password has been obtainedfrom the Network Administrator.Entering or Changing FEInterface IP AddressesTo enter or change FE Interface IP Addresses, perform the procedure inTable I-17.Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersnStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programminginformation and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01.– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.1Obtain the correct IP Addresses and Subnet Masks for the BTS Router FE Interfaces from theNetwork Administrator.2If a HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Card/Module MMI or BTS Router (BTSRTR)communication has not been created, create one as described in Table I-1 of this appendix.3Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router, and start a Communication Session as describedin Table I-2 in this appendix.table continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continued I-88 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersnActionStepNOTEExamples in this procedure show Prompts for BTSRTR–bts#–1–1 and BTSRTR–bts#–1–2, butthe procedure can be used for any Router in any BTS Router Group or a BTS Router running theCanned Configuration File (BTSRTR1 or BTSRTR2).4At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the PrivilegedEXEC Mode:enable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enablePassword:5Enter the Privileged EXEC Mode Password.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enablePassword:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#6At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, display the FE Interface IP Addressesby typing:show ip interface brief– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# show ip interface briefInterface IP Address OK? MethodStatus ProtocolFastEthernet0/0 192.168.146.1 YESNVRAM up upSerial0:0 unassigned YES unsetadministratively down downFastEthernet0/1 unassigned YESunset administratively down downSerial1:0 unassigned YES unsetadministratively down downBTSRTR–bts#–1–1#7For a FastEthernet0/0 (fa0/0) or FastEthernet0/1(fa0/1) Interface that does not have a correct IPAddress, or does not have an assigned IP Address, enter the following at the BTS Router Promptto access the Global Configuration Mode:configure terminal– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#table continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-89PRELIMINARYTable I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersnActionStep8At the Global Configure Mode Prompt, enter the following command to access the ConfigureInterface Submode for the interface requiring IP Address assignment/change:interface fastethernetinterface#– Where interface# = 0/0 or 0/1, as applicable.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)# int fa0/1BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#9At the Configure Interface Submode Prompt, assign or change the interface IP Address byentering the following command.ip address IP_addr Subnet_mask– Where:IP_addr = the required IP Address for the interface; for example, 192.168.147.1Subnet_mask = the required Subnet Mask for the interface; for example, 255.255.255.0– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#10 To complete configuration of the interface, enter the following Parameter Settings, one at a time,pressing Enter after each:duplex fullspeed 100keepalive 1no shutdown11 Return to the Global Configuration Mode by entering the exit Command.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# exitBTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#12 If the IP Address and/or Parameters for the other FE Interface on the BTS Router need to beassigned or changed at this time, repeat Step 8 through Step 11 for the other FE Interface.table continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continued I-90 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYTable I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersnActionStep13 Once the correct parameters have been set for all FE Interfaces, return to the Privileged EXECMode Prompt by holding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl +z).– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ^z01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consoleBTSRTR–bts#–1–1#NOTEEntering exit twice, pressing the Enter Key after each entry, will also complete the InterfaceConfiguration and return the BTS Router to the Privileged EXEC Mode.14 Save the Interface Configuration changes to the Start–up Configuration File on the CF MemoryCard by entering the following command.copy running–config startup–config– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run startBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?15 Press Enter.– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run startBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?Building configuration...!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK]BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#16 If all FE IP Address Entries/Changes for the BTS Router are complete, enter the following toreturn the BTS Router to user EXEC Mode:disable– A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# disableBTSRTR–bts#–1–1>17 Determine if any other Router requires the FE Interfaces to be assigned/changed.SIf no other Router requires the FE Interfaces to be assigned/changed, proceed to Step 20.If FE Interfaces on another Router must be assigned/changed, proceed to Step 18.18 Disconnect the 8–contact Modular Plug from the current Router CONSOLE Port and connect it to theCONSOLE Port of the other Router.table continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-91PRELIMINARYTable I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersnActionStep19 Press the Enter Key, and when the BTS Router User EXEC Mode Prompt appears, repeat Step 3through Step 16 for the other Router.20 When the BTS Router is in User EXEC Mode, close the HyperTerminal Session and disconnectthe LMF Computer and additional components from the BTS Router. BTS Router CannedConfiguration FileThis section presents listings of the blue and red Router CannedConfiguration File contents for the MWR 1941 BTS Routers. The blueRouter is the primary Router on the BTS LAN Subnet 192.168.146.0,and the red Router is the primary on BTS LAN Subnet 192.168.147.0.The Canned Configuration Files allow communication with the BTSRouters for both on–site FE Cabling Connectivity Verification and fordownloading the BTS Routers from the network with the full,site–specific Operational Configuration.Obtaining the LatestConfiguration File ContentThe files included here are for example only. The correct CannedConfiguration File Content for each BTS Router should be generated atthe OMC–R by using the /screl/active/bin/gen_btsrtr_canned_config.kshScript.Configuration File ExamplesExamples of both Configuration Files are provided in the followingsubsections.“Blue” BTS Router CannedConfiguration! Canned Config file for BTSRTR1version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!no logging console!!ip Subnet–zero ip classlessip pim bidir–enable!I
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continued I-92 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYdisable–eadi!Redundancy mode y–cable standby use–interface Loopback101 health standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaulinterface loopback 101 description BTSRTR health loopback no ip address interface loopback 102 description BTSRTR revertive loopback no ip address !! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK!controller T1 0/0 description 1st Span on BTSRTR framing esf linecode b8zs cablelength short 133 Clock Source line channel–group 0 Timeslots 1–24 speed 64! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebootedinterface Multilink 1 ip address negotiated no ip route–cache no cdp enable ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Set–up Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time!interface Serial0/0:0 no ip address encapsulation ppp keepalive 1 ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Set–up Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them!interface FastEthernet0/0 ip address 192.168.146.1 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 1 timers 1 3 standby 1 preempt standby 1 priority 100 standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3 standby 1 name one standby 1 track Fa0/1 10 standby 1 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 health interfaceI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-93PRELIMINARY standby 1 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface standby 1 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!interface FastEthernet0/1 ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 2 timers 1 3 standby 2 preempt standby 2 priority 100 standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3 standby 2 name two standby 2 track Fa0/0 10 standby 2 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 health interface standby 2 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface standby 2 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK!ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1!line con 0 exec–timeout 15 0 password ciscoline aux 0 Login password ciscoline vty 0 4 Login password ciscoend“Red” BTS Router CannedConfiguration! Canned Config file for BTSRTR2version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR2!no logging console!!ip Subnet–zero ip classlessip pim bidir–enable!disable–eadiI
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continued I-94 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARY!Redundancy mode y–cable standby use–interface Loopback101 health standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaulinterface loopback 101 description BTSRTR health loopback no ip address interface loopback 102 description BTSRTR revertive loopback no ip address !! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK!controller T1 0/0 description 1st Span on BTSRTR framing esf linecode b8zs cablelength short 133 Clock Source line channel–group 0 Timeslots 1–24 speed 64! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebootedinterface Multilink 1 ip address negotiated no ip route–cache no cdp enable ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Set–up Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time!interface Serial0/0:0 no ip address encapsulation ppp keepalive 1 ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Set–up Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them!interface FastEthernet0/0 ip address 192.168.146.2 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 1 timers 1 3 standby 1 preempt standby 1 priority 100 standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3 standby 1 name one standby 1 track Fa0/1 10 standby 1 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 health interface standby 1 track Loopback101 10I
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-95PRELIMINARY ! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface standby 1 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!interface FastEthernet0/1 ip address 192.168.147.2 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 2 timers 1 3 standby 2 preempt standby 2 priority 100 standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3 standby 2 name two standby 2 track Fa0/0 10 standby 2 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 health interface standby 2 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface standby 2 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK!ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1!line con 0 exec–timeout 15 0 password ciscoline aux 0 Login password ciscoline vty 0 4 Login password ciscoendI
Preparation for Site Turn–over I-96 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYPreparation for Site Turn–overPrepare the BTS Site for turn–over to the control of the OMC–R byperforming the procedures in Table I-18 and Table I-19.Table I-18: Prepare for Site Turn–overnStep Action1After disconnecting it from the BTS Router, shut down the LMF Computer.2If any additional external support equipment was used during the Installation Process, shut it downand disconnect it from the frame.3Account for all tools used and parts removed from the frame during the installation, being surenone were left inside the frame.4Visually inspect the frame for any foreign objects left inside, and remove any discovered.5Visually inspect all Cable Connections, ensuring they are connected as required for normal BTSOperation.6Ensure all Internal Frame Cables are routed and secured to prevent damage to them when theCabinet Doors are closed.7Ensure all External Frame and BTS Router Cables are routed and secured so they will not interferewith normal Maintenance and Operational Activities at the site.8Ensure that the BTS Routers are powered up and not reporting alarms other than Span Alarms. Returning the Site to OMC–RControlPerform the procedure in Table I-19 to return the site to OMC–RControl.Table I-19: Returning the Site to Operational ControlnStep Action1Contact the OMC–R, and notify the operator that the installation is complete.2Request notification from the operator when the BTS Routers have been downloaded with the fullsite–specific Configurations and are verified as functioning normally.3When notified that Router operation has been verified and the OMC–R can assume control of thesite, perform the following actions.3a On any frames that were opened, close and secure the Cabinet Doors.3b Verify that no Alarm Conditions are being reported to the OMC–R with the Cabinet Doors closed.3c Prepare all equipment, tools, and parts removed from the frame for transport from the site. I
Preparation for Site Turn–over – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP I-97PRELIMINARYWhat to Do NextThe installation of the Packet Backhaul Option is complete. When thesite is secured, there are no further actions to perform at the BTS Site.I
FEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Index-1PRELIMINARYIndexNumbers10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,1-11 10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-7 10BaseT/10Base2 converter, LMF to BTSconnection, 3-18 2–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-11 AAbbreviatedRX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-6 TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-6 Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATPACTIVE LEDGLI, 6-33 MCC–8/24 Card, 6-37 Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address,F-8 Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIBAddress, F-14 Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address,F-9 Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) TestSet GPIB Address, F-10 Agilent E4406A, calibration, F-30 Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address,F-5 Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address, F-7Alarm Connector Location/Pin, 3-137 ALARM LED, GLI, 6-34 Alarm Monitor window, 3-139 Alarm Reporting Display, 3-139 All Cal/Audit procedure, 3-119 All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-9 All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,RFDS, 6-29 All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-8 All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6 ATPall inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-6 automated introduction, 4-1 code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,4-21 code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-21failure report generation, 4-25 FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-24 pilot time offset, 4-18 prerequisites, 4-2 spectral purity TX mask, 4-14 test matrix/detailed optimization, C-1 test set–up, 3-68 , 3-88 Advantest R3267/R3562DRDCs, 3-71 , 3-91 TRDCs, 3-73 , 3-93 Advantest R3465, 3-68 , 3-88 Agilent 8935, DRDCs, 3-68 , 3-88 Agilent 8935/E4432B, DRDCs, 3-70 , 3-72 , 3-90, 3-92 Agilent E4406A/E4432BDRDCs, 3-70 , 3-90 TRDCs, 3-72 , 3-92 CyberTest, 3-68 , 3-88 HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, 3-69 , 3-89 HP 8921A, 800 MHz, 3-69 , 3-89 waveform quality (Rho), 4-16 waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,4-16 ATP – Reduced, 4-1 Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9
Index – continued Index-2 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYBBasic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1 Bay Level Offset calibrationdescription, 3-109 purpose, 3-109 when to calibrate, 3-110 Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-11
Index – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Index-3PRELIMINARYBBXAdding, 3-48–3-50Prerequisites, 3-48–3-50Logical data, 4-79–4-81BBXcarrier spectral purity, 4-13 gain set point vs SIF output considerations, D-1 primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,4-11 BBX LED status combinations, 6-36 BBX2 Connector, 6-22 BLO. See Bay Level Offset calibrationBroad Band Receiver. See BBXBTSdownload, 3-36 Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-33 LMF connection, 3-17 , 3-18 RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-12 system software download, 3-4 BTS frame, initial power–up, 2-12 BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FERBTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-26 BTS loginCLI environment, 3-29 General, 3-25 GUI environment, 3-26 BTS LogoutCLI environment, 3-31 GUI environment, 3-30 BTS router communication session, establishing, I-5 BTS router connectionsFE verification, I-6 programming, I-6 Create CAL File, 3-125 Ccable calibration, automatic, test set–up, 3-60 , 3-61 ,3-80 , 3-81 Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-61 , 3-81 Advantest R3465, 3-60 , 3-80 Agilent 8935, 3-60 , 3-80 Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-61 , 3-62 , 3-81 , 3-82 CyberTest, 3-60 , 3-80 HP 8921A, 3-60 , 3-80 CAL file. See calibration data fileCalibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator &Spectrum Analyzer, 3-104 Calibrating, Test Equipment, 3-100 Calibrating Cables, Overview, 3-101 Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS InterfaceHP83236B, F-35 Calibrating Test Cabling using CommunicationsSystem Analyzer, 3-102 Calibration, In–Service, H-23 calibrationcalibration data file, 3-111 Gigatronics 8542B, F-33 Calibration Audit failure, 6-12 calibration data file, description of, 3-111 Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,6-6 Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-5 Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-9 Cannot ENABLE device, 6-9 Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2 Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Powermeasurement, 6-18 Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offsetmeasurement, 6-17 Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-17 CDF, 3-4 site equipage verification, 3-5 site type and equipage data information, 2-1 CDI Alarmwith Alarms Test Box, 3-140 without Alarms Test Box, 3-144 CDMAallocation diagram for the North American, cellulartelephone frequency spectrum, E-4 optimization/ATP test matrix, C-1 subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional testequipment, 1-11 Cell Siteequipage verification, 2-1 types configuration, 3-3 Cell Site Data File. See CDFCIO Connectors, 6-23
Index – continued Index-4 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYCLI, 3-25 Clock Sync Module. See CSMCLPA, 2-12 Code domain power/noise flooracceptance test, 4-21 analyzer display, 4-22 Command Line Interface, 3-25 command terminal, settings, I-2 Common power supply verification, 2-11 , 2-13 Communication test set, rear panel, F-20 , F-21 Communications test set. See Test equipmentcommunications test set, TX acceptance tests, 4-4 Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-55 , 3-75 Connector FunctionalityBackplane, Troubleshooting, 6-22 Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-22 Control, TX output verification, 4-5 Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 4-26 Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11 Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,4-26 Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 4-26 CSMclock source, select, 3-41 enable, 3-42 LEDs, 3-45 system description, 3-44 CSM clock source, select, 3-41 CSM frequency verification, 3-47 CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-31 DDC Power Pre–test, BTS Frame, 2-6 DC Power Problems, SCCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-26 DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-30 Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, C-1 Devices, download. See DownloadDigital Control Problems, 6-24 SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-24 Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9 Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9 diversity receive path, definition, 3-109 expansion frame, 3-110 stand–alone frame, 3-109 diversity RX path. See diversity receive pathDocuments, required, 1-12 DownloadSee also DevicesBTS, 3-36 BTS system software, 3-4 Download BLO Procedure, 3-121 download ROM and RAM code. See ROM codeDownload/Enable MCCs, 3-43 Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-39 Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10 EE1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-16 E4406A, calibration, F-30 Enable CSMs. See CSMEquipment Overview, 1-16 Equipment warm-up, 3-59 , 3-79 establish MMI communication, 3-31 Ethernet LANinterconnect diagram, 3-33 transceiver, 1-7 Ethernet LAN termination, 2-5 Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-28 External Test Equipment Removal, 5-3 FFailure report generation, 4-25 FER, acceptance test, 4-23 Files, intermediate file, 4-25 files, calibration data, 3-111 Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) orequivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10 Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, testequipment, 1-9 Folder Structure Overview, 3-8
Index – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Index-5PRELIMINARYforward link problem after passing reduced ATP, 6-17Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1 FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-32 Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10 GGain set point, D-1 Generating an ATP Report, 4-25 General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4 Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address, F-17Gigatronics 8542 power meter, calibration, F-33 GLI Connector, 6-22 GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-22 GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-33 GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-35 GPIB, F-19 , F-22 , F-24 cables, 1-9 set address, HP 437B, F-16 GPIB AddressAdvantest R3267, F-8 Advantest R3465, F-14 Advantest R3562, F-9 Agilent (formerly HP) 8935, F-10 Agilent E4406A, F-5 Agilent E4432B, F-7 Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter, F-17 Hewlett Packard HP8921a & HP83236A/B, F-12 Motorola CyberTest, F-15 GPIB Addresses, 3-96 GPIB Interface Box, RS232, F-18 GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5 GPS Initialization/Verificationestimated position accuracy, 3-50 surveyed position accuracy, 3-50 GPS satellite system, 3-41 Graphical User Interface, 3-20 Group Line Interface. See GLIGUI, 3-20 HHardware Requirements, 1-6 Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIBAddress, F-12 High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optionaltest equipment, 1-11 High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required testequipment, 1-10 HP 437Pre–calibration, F-31 setting GPIB address, F-16 HP 83236A, F-22 HP 8921A PCS interface, Cables Connection for 10MHz Signal and GPIB , F-20 , F-21 HP8921A, F-22 Test equipment connections , F-19 HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-47 Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9 HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminalconnection, 3-13 HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-13 II and Q values, B-1 In–Service Calibration, H-23 preliminary Agilent test equipment set–up, H-3 ,H-6 test set–up diagramsDRDC, Advantest, 3-71 , 3-91 TRDC, Advantest, 3-73 , 3-93 Initial HP8921A setup, F-35 Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminaryoperations, 2-2 Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3 Initial power–up, BTS frame, 2-12 Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-25 Internal Assemblies and FRUs, 1-18 IP Addresses, Agilent E7495A, 3-96 IS–97 specification, B-1 LLAN, optional test equipment, 1-11
Index – continued Index-6 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYLAN connectors, external, 2-1 , 2-2 , 2-3 , 2-5 LAN termination, 2-5 LED, CSM, 3-45 LED Status Combinations for all Modules exceptGLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-30 LIF, Load Information File, 3-9 LMF, F-19 , F-24 1X FER acceptance test, 4-4 1X upgrade preparation, home directory, 3-9 BTS connection, 3-18 platform requirements, 1-6 to BTS connection, 3-16 , 3-17 TX acceptance tests, 4-4 view CDF information, 3-5 LMF BTS displays, 3-19 LMF computer and software, 1-6 LMF Removal, 5-4 Load Information File, 3-9 Local Maintenance Facility. See LMFLogging Into a BTS, 3-25 Logging Out, 3-30 Logical BTS, 1-16 Numbering, 1-17 LPA errors, 6-10 LPA Module LED, 6-39 LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-39 MMASTER LED, GLI, 6-34 MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-37 MMI common connections, 3-32 MMI ConnectorCSM, 6-32 GLI, 6-35 MMI Connectors, MCC–8, 6-38 MMI equipment setup, 3-32 Module status indicators, 6-30 Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address, F-15 Multi Channel Card. See MCCMulti–FER test Failure, 6-19 NNECF, 3-4 New installations, 1-4 No AMR control, 6-25 No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-25 No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-26 No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specificGLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-27 No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-24 No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-24 No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-25 No or missing span line traffic, 6-25 North American, cellular telephone system frequencyspectrum, CDMA allocation, E-4 OOnline Help, 3-32 optimization/ATP, test set–upHP 8921A, 800 MHz, H-22 HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, H-22 Optional test equipment, 1-10 10 MHz rubidium standard, 1-11 2–way splitter, 1-11 CDMA subscriber mobile or portableradiotelephone, 1-11 duplexer, 1-10 frequency counter, 1-10 LAN tester, 1-11 oscilloscope, 1-11 RF circular, 1-11 RF test cable, 1-11 spectrum analyzer, 1-10 Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-11 PPCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,3-18 Periodic optimization, 1-4 Pilot Time Offset. See PNPilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-18 Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-147 Ping, 3-33 PNoffset programming information, B-1
Index – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Index-7PRELIMINARYoffset usage, B-1 PN offset per sector, B-1 PN Offset Usage , B-1 power, removal, 2-15 DC power, 2-15 Power Delta CalibrationAdvantest, H-15 Agilent 8935, H-10 HP8921A, H-12 Power Input, 6-22 Power Meter, setting GPIB address, HP437B, F-16 Power meter, TX acceptance tests, 4-4 Power Supply Module Interface, 6-22 Pre–calibration, HP 437, F-31 Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3 Preliminary operationscell Site types, 2-1 test data sheets, A-2 Prepare to Leave the SiteExternal Test Equipment Removal, 5-3 Final Checks before leaving site, 5-5 LMF Removal, 5-4 Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans, 5-5 Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2 Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to theCBSC, 4-26 , 6-8 , 6-9 Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 4-26 Pseudorandom Noise. See PNPWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC–8/24E Card,6-38 PWR/ALM LEDBBX, 6-36 CSM, 6-31 DC/DC Converter, 6-30 generic, 6-30 MCC–8/24E Card, 6-37 RRAM code, described, 3-36 receive pathcalibration, 3-109 component verification, 3-110 definition, 3-109 Reduced ATP, 4-1 Report generation, ATP report, 4-25 Required test equipmentcommunications system analyzer, 1-8 digital multimeter, 1-9 directional coupler, 1-9 GPIB cables, 1-9 high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-10 RF adapters, 1-10 RF attenuator, 1-9 RF load, 1-10 RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7 timing reference cables, 1-9 Required Test Equipment and Software, 1-5 , 1-6 ,1-7 RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-35 RFattenuator, 1-9 Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11 load for required test equipment, 1-10 required test equipment load, 1-10 test cable, 1-10 RF path, fault isolation, 6-13 RF path calibration. See Bay Level Offset calibrationRFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-28 RFDS calibrationdescription, 3-134 procedure, 3-135 RFDS Location, 1-26 RFDS parameters, 3-126 checking, 3-127 setting, 3-127 RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-37 RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-134 RhoTX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-16 waveform quality requirements, 4-16 ROM codedescribed, 3-36 downloading, G-1 procedure, G-2 RS232 GPIB Interface Box, F-18 RS232 to GPIB interfacemodifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7
Index – continued Index-8 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP FEB 2005PRELIMINARYrequired test equipment, 1-7 RXacceptance tests, FER, 4-23 antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-9 sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-12 RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-28 RX path. See receive pathSSC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, C-2 SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-23 SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-6 Selecting Test Equipment, 3-96 Set Antenna Map Data, 3-132 Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-133 Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-107 Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-108 shut–down, BTS power. See power, removalSIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, D-1signal generator, 1X FER acceptance test, 4-4 Site, equipage verification, 3-5 Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2 Site documents, 1-12 Site equipage, CDF/NECF, 3-4 Site expansion, 1-4 Software Release caveats, 4-26 Span I/O boardE1 span isolation, illustration, 3-16 T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-16 Span lineT1/E1 verification equipment, 1-11 troubleshooting, 6-41 Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-43 Span Line connector , 6-22 SPANS LED, 6-34 Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundantBBX, 4-11 Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-14 Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10 STATUS LED, GLI, 6-34 Supported Test Sets, 3-55 , 3-75 SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-32 System Connectivity Test, F-22 TT1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-16 Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-11 terminal communication settings, I-2 Test data sheetsAlarm verification, A-10 general optimization checklist, A-4 GPS receiver operation, A-5 initial power tests, A-3 pre–power tests, A-3 preliminary operations, A-2 RX antenna VSWR, A-9 SCLPA convergence, A-6 site checklist, A-2 TX antenna VSWR, A-9 TX BLO, A-7 verification of test equipment used, A-1 Test Equipment, Calibrating, 3-100 Test equipmentSee also Optional test equipment; Required testequipmentset up, TX output verification/control, 4-5 system analyzer, 1-8 TX acceptance tests, 4-4 verification data sheets, A-1 Test equipment connections , preliminary AgilentE4406A/E4432B set–up, F-28 Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay LevelOffset, F-40 Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-56 , 3-76 Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-114 Timing reference cables, required test equipmentModel SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9 Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9 transmit pathcalibration, 3-109 component verification, 3-110 definition, 3-109 Transmit TX path audit, 3-122
Index – continuedFEB 2005 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Index-9PRELIMINARYTransmit TX path calibration, 3-115 TroubleshootingDC Power Problems, 6-26 RF path fault isolation, 6-13 Set span configuration, 6-43 span problems, 6-41 TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-27 TX level accuracy fault isolation, 6-16 troubleshootingcommunications system analyzer communication,6-6 Ethernet LAN, 6-3 GLI IP address, 6-4 LMF login failure, 6-2 power meter communication, 6-5 signal generator communication, 6-6 TSU NAM, programmingdescription, 3-130 parameter ranges, 3-131 parameters, 3-130 procedure, 3-136 TXacceptance testscode domain power/noise floor, 4-20 equipment setup, 4-4 pilot time offset, 4-18 spectral purity mask, 4-13 spectrum analyzer display, 4-15 waveform quality (rho), 4-16 all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-6 antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-9 , A-10 BLO test data sheets, A-7 level accuracy fault isolation, 6-16 output acceptance testscode domain power noise, 4-11 pilot time offset, 4-11 waveform quality, 4-11 TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , E-2 TX and RX Signal Routing, SCCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-27 TX Audit Test, 3-123 TX calibration, 3-118 All Cal/Audit, 3-119 set–up, 3-64 , 3-84 Advantest R3267, 3-66 , 3-86 , H-21 Advantest R3465, 3-65 , 3-85 Agilent 8935, 3-64 , 3-84 Agilent E4406A, 3-66 , 3-86 , H-21 CyberTest, 3-64 , 3-84 HP 8921A, 3-65 , 3-85 tx fine adjust, B-1 TX path. See transmit pathTX path calibration, 3-118 TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-3 UUpdating Calibration Data FilesCopy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 4-26 Software Release caveats, 4-26 UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-18 Vverification during calibration, 3-110 Verifytest equipment used, test data sheets, A-1 TX output, 4-5 Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-38 WWaveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,4-16 XXCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-22 Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,3-18
*68P09262A58−C*68P09262A58–C
PRELIMINARY68P09262A58–CFEB 2005ENGLISH1 of 1CDMA2000 1XSoftware Release R2.16.5.xTechnicalInformation1X SC 4812T LITE BTSOPTIMIZATION/ATPSC4812T LITE
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.5.XSC4812T LITECDMA2000 1X1X SC 4812T LITE BTS OPTIMIZATION/ATPENGLISHFEB 200568P09262A58–CPRELIMINARY1 of 1
Technical Information Products and Services11STANDARD MANUAL PRINTING INSTRUCTIONSSTANDARD SPECIFICATIONS – FOR REFERENCE–DO NOT MODIFYPart Number: 68P09262A58–C APC:Title: 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.5.x379PAPER:Body: 70 lb.Inside Cover: 65 lb. CougarTabs: 110 lb. IndexBinder Cover: Standard TEDcover – 10 pt. Carolina1st. LEVEL TABS:Single Sided5 CutsClear MylarPantone 2706–CBlack Ink2nd. LEVEL TABS: FINISHING:3–Ring BinderSlant–D3–Hole Punched(5/16–in. dia.)Shrink Wrap BodyBlack ink for body, inside cover, and binder cover.SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONSTAB and SHEET SIZE/QUANTITY7X9 08.5x11 277 11x17 0NON–STANDARD SPECIFICATIONSTape Bound Corner Stitch Other: Meet with manager to determine the deliverable.Sheets = (Total Pages) / 2Single Sided7 CutsClear MylarWhiteBlack InkFilename: 68P09262A58–C1st Level Tabs 16 2nd Level Tabs 0Volume FEB 2005of DatePrint Vendor: eDOC
Preparatory Tasks Optimization/Calibration Acceptance TestProcedures Prepare to leave the SiteMANUAL TITLEIntroductionPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACKCUT 1 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGESFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4 68P09262A58–C1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***AND1CUT 2 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND2CUT 3 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND3CUT 4 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND4CUT 5 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND5
Data Sheets PN Offset / I & Q OffsetRegtr. Programming Info. FRU Optimization / ATP Test Matrix BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS OutputMANUAL TITLETroubleshootingPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACKCUT 1 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGESFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4 68P09262A58–C1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***AND6CUT 2 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDACUT 3 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDBCUT 4 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCCUT 5 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDD
Test EquipmentPreparation Downloading ROM Code In–Service Calibration Packet BackhaulConfigurationMANUAL TITLECDMA Operating Freq.Programming InformationPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACKCUT 1 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGESFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4 68P09262A58–C1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***ANDECUT 2 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDFCUT 3 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDGCUT 4 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDHCUT 5 – IN FRONT OF APPENDIXORBETWEEN PAGES ANDI
MANUAL TITLEIndexPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACKCUT 1 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGESFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4 68P09262A58–C1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***ANDIndexCUT 2 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 3 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 4 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 5 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND

Navigation menu